JP7347590B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines , gaming machines equipped with sensors are known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-094348

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement regarding sensor detection .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve sensor detection .

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side, and a gaming machine arranged on the front side of the gaming board at an interval that allows a game medium to pass through. a light-transmissive transparent plate; a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the back side of the game board and is visible to the player through the opening of the game board; and a displacement member that is disposed on the back side of the displacement member. a display device that is installed and visible to the player through the opening of the game board; and a sensor device that can detect a predetermined object on the front side of the transparent plate, and the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced to a position overlapping at least a portion of the detectable area of the sensor device, the size of the detectable area of the sensor device is changed in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member, and the sensor device is in a state where it can be detected at least before and after the displacement of the displacement member, and the display device is capable of displaying a display corresponding to the detection by the sensor device and a display corresponding to the displacement of the displacement member , The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a predetermined process for causing the sensor device to detect the predetermined object when the gaming machine is powered on, and the gaming machine is capable of relative displacement with respect to the displacement member. The sensor device is configured to include a predetermined member that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member, and is configured to be able to displace the predetermined member to a position overlapping at least a portion of the detectable area of the sensor device.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve sensor detection .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotating body lifting and lowering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary body elevating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary body elevating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the container. (a) is a side view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body. It is a table showing combinations of figures of a first rotating body and a second rotating body. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. FIG. 3 is a front view of the central floating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member. It is a front view of a left-right rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the left-right rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left-right rotation unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit arranged in the lowered position; (a) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit arranged in the lowered position; (a) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (a) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotating unit, (b) is a top view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotating unit, and (c) is the XLIc-XLIc of FIG. 41(b). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotating unit along the line. (a) is a front view of the left and right sensor devices, and (b) is a sectional view of the left and right sensor devices taken along the line XLIIb-XLIIb in FIG. 42(a). 43(a) is a front view of the left and right sensor devices, and FIG. 43(b) is a sectional view of the left and right sensor devices taken along the line XLIIIb-XLIIIb in FIG. 43(a). 44(a) is a front view of the left and right sensor devices, and FIG. 44(b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor devices taken along the line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). 45(a) is a front view of the left and right sensor devices, and FIG. 45(b) is a sectional view of the left and right sensor devices taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass of the glass unit. (a) is a side view of the container in the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XLVIIb in FIG. 47(a). It is a table showing combinations of figures of a first rotating body and a second rotating body. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. (a) is a side view of the container in the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LIb in FIG. 51(a). It is a table showing combinations of figures of a first rotating body and a second rotating body. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. (a) is a top view of the central floating unit in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LVb in FIG. 55(a), and (c) is a top view of the central floating unit in the fourth embodiment. Fig. 55(a) is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state shown in Fig. 55(a). (a) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit. (a) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotating unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotating unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 2nd rotating body in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a side view of the container in which the second rotating body is arranged as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXa in FIG. 58, and (b) is a front view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 59(a). 59(c) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIc in FIG. 59(b), and FIG. 59(d) is a partially enlarged side view of the second rotating body in FIG. 59(a). , (e) is a partially enlarged side view of the second rotating body in FIG. 59(c). (a) is a timing chart showing the output voltage of the sensor section when the second gear rotates in the direction of sliding with respect to the engagement piece, and (b) to (d) are the timing charts of FIG. 60(a), respectively. 60(e) is a timing chart showing an example of the operating state of the drive motor in the state, and (e) is a front view of the second gear and the end plate when the drive motor is stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 60(b); (f) is a front view of the second gear and the end plate when the drive motor is stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 60(d), and (g) is a front view of the drive motor at the timing shown in FIG. 60(d). It is a front view of a 2nd gear and an end face plate when stopped. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 1st rotating body in 7th Embodiment. 62(a) is a side view of the container viewed from the side of the engaging member, and FIG. 62(b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62(a). (a), (c), (e), and (g) are side views of the first rotating body and the transmission gear as viewed along the axial direction from the drive side end plate side, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. 63(a) is a front view of the first rotating body and the transmission gear as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb, and (d) is a front view of the first rotating body and the transmission gear as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIId in FIG. 63(c). (f) is a front view of the first rotating body and the transmission gear as seen in the direction of arrow LXIIIf in FIG. 63(e), and (h) is a front view of the first rotation as seen in the direction of arrow LXIIIh in FIG. 63(g). FIG. 3 is a front view of the body and the transmission gear. It is a front exploded perspective view of the container and a pair of rotating bodies in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a side view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64, and (b) is a front view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow LXVb in FIG. 65(a). (a) to (d) are side views of the shielding device and the locking device; (a) and (b) are side views of the shielding device and the locking device; It is a front exploded perspective view of a container and a pair of rotating bodies in a 9th embodiment. (a) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and (b) is a rear view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69(a). (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the container 9330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the container taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). 69 is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68. FIG. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the operating unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of the central unit in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a container. It is a top view of a container and a circular arc plate member. (a) is a top view of the container and the arcuate plate member, and (b) is a sectional view of the container and the arcuate plate member taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a side view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIa in FIG. 75, and (b) is a front view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). (a) is a bottom view of the upper intermediate plate, (b) is a sectional view of the upper intermediate plate taken along the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79(a), and (c) is a top view of the lower intermediate plate. 79(d) is a sectional view of the lower intermediate plate taken along the line LXXIXd-LXXIXd in FIG. 79(c). (a) is a front perspective view of the reflection member, and (b) is a partially exploded front perspective view of the reflection member, with connection portions of the reflection member being exploded. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflective member, and the vertical axis rotating body taken along the line LXXXIa-LXXXIa in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflective member, and the vertical axis rotating body when viewed in the direction LXXXIb. (a) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflective member, and the vertical axis rotating body taken along the line LXXXIa-LXXXIa in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflective member, and the vertical axis rotating body as viewed in the direction of LXXXIIb. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflection member, and the vertical axis rotating body taken along the line LXXXIa-LXXXIa in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflective member, and the vertical axis rotating body as viewed in the direction LXXXIIIb. (a) and (b) are top views of the container, (c) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIVc in FIG. 84(a), and (d) is a top view of the container in FIG. 84(b). ) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIVd. (a) is a front view of the container in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the container in a posture with the side wall body of the container facing the front. (a) to (d) are top views of the container. (a) to (c) are external views of the first rotating body in the twelfth embodiment. (a) to (c) are external views of the second rotating body. (a) to (c) are external views of a pair of rotating bodies. (a) to (c) are external views of a pair of rotating bodies. (a) to (c) are external views of the first rotating body in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) to (c) are side views of the container. (a) and (b) are front views of a pair of rotating bodies. (a) to (c) are side views of the container. (a) and (b) are side views of a container and a connecting member in a fourteenth embodiment. (a) to (d) are partial side views of the container in the fifteenth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 16a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the second through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. Its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the third winning hole 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a region where prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B can be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, or the third winning hole 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in any of the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the third winning hole 82. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and balls are likely to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. This refers to a state of the game where it is easy for a ball to enter the third winning hole 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change or time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 are opened. The amount of time it takes has also been changed and is set to be longer than normal. When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in an open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in a closed state (closed state) Compared to the case where the ball is in the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, it becomes easier for balls to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, balls are likely to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 is not changed, or the opening time is changed. In addition to changing the time, a change may be made to increase the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are released in one win than usual. In addition, during probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 are opened. At least one of the time for opening and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per win may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a attached to the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 are opened, and the first Instead of changing the number of times the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are released, only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased compared to the normal one.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B triggered by a winning (starting winning) in any one of the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the third winning hole 82. A third symbol display device 81 is configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays a variable third symbol while synchronizing the display of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol using passing as a trigger is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Furthermore, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, central floating unit 400, and left/right rotation unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a portion of their relative displacement member 450 and driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86, causing the opening to open. It is made visible through the section.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 This is a fluctuating display in which the and is alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, giving the player more opportunities for the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a of the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82 to be in the open state. be able to. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the open time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a per win, etc. If the state is such that it is easy for balls to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole during time saving, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be made constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left region of the variable display unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right region of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board, among the balls fired at the game board, can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol is displayed. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but can be less than three times, or more than five times (for example, eight times). You can also set it to . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. Further, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, a third winning opening 82 is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, the second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. As a result, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the third winning hole 82 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. are configured the same, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 are different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

Further, a second electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning hole 82. This second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the third prize opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a It is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win into the third winning hole 82.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is high even in a low probability state when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. The condition is also the same. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball enters the first winning hole 64 when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. The price is set higher than if you won. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a as in the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82, and the ball can always be won. It is in a state.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessories attached to the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 82. A ball is fired toward the first winning port 64 where there is no electric accessory so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first winning port 64. It is more advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities for jackpot drawings and aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third prize opening 82 is likely to be in the open state, and the third prize opening 82 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the third prize opening 82 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the second through gate 67. It is more advantageous for the player to open the second electric accessory 82a and aim for a 15R jackpot by winning the third prize opening 82.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

In addition, not limited to the form described above, when a ball passes through either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, a winning lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol may be drawn. The second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning hole 82 or the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 may be displaced to the open state by the drawing of the symbol. In this case, since the symbols to be drawn are different when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the electric accessory that opens when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 will be selected one by one.

As a result, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is released when a hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit right and passes through the second through gate 67, the second symbol will be drawn and the second symbol will be drawn. When a winning number is selected in the lottery of two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is released, and when the ball is hit to the left and passes through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn, and the second symbol is drawn. When a winning symbol is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, a game state is created in which the first electric accessory 640a is released.

Therefore, if the game state is such that it is easy to win the second symbol during the probability change, and the game state is such that a different symbol from the second symbol is likely to be won during the time saving, then during the probability change, the second through gate 67 is hit by hitting right. In the game state where it is easy to win the ball by passing through the second electric accessory 82a and opening the second electric accessory 82a, and during the time saving mode, the ball is hit to the left and passes through the first through gate 66, opening the first electric accessory 82a and winning the ball. You can create a gaming state that is easy to play. Therefore, the gaming states during normal mode, time saving mode, and variable probability mode can be made to be different from each other, so that the players can enjoy each gaming mode.
In addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is released when a hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit to the right and passes through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is different from the second symbol. A symbol is drawn, and when a winning symbol is selected in a lottery different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released, and when the ball is hit to the left and passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is drawn. A game state can also be created in which the second electric accessory 82a is released when a lottery is drawn and a hit is selected for the second symbol.
In this case, regardless of whether the probability is changing or the time is being shortened, when the ball is hit to the right and passes through the second through gate 67, the first electric accessory is opened, and the game state is such that the ball can easily enter the second prize opening 640. When the ball is hit to the left and passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened and the ball can be brought into a game state where it is easy to win a prize in the third prize opening 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the way he hits, such as from hitting the right to hitting the left, or from hitting the left to the right. Therefore, it is possible for the player to change the way he or she plays the game at any time, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in any of the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 64, and the third winning hole 82 becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable time) After the elapsed time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed. Occurrence is indicated. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning hole 64, for example. , or the left side of the variable display unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 320, 350, 435, and 450.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. Moreover, FIGS. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is placed in the lowered position, the central floating unit 400 is placed in the raised position, and the left-right rotation unit 500 is placed in the retracted position. A state in which the unit 300 is placed in the raised position, the central floating unit 400 is placed in the lowered position, and the left-right rotation unit 500 is placed in the extended position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and the inner space of the back case 210 includes a rotating body lifting unit 300 above and below, and a central floating unit 300. The units 400 are respectively arranged, and a pair of left and right rotation units 500 and left and right sensor devices 600 are arranged on the left and right sides of the central floating unit 400.

The back case 210 is a box that includes a bottom wall 211 and an outer wall 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 211, and one side (front left side in the paper of FIG. 6) is open by each of these walls 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size that corresponds to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, allows the third symbol display device 81 to be disposed therein).

The rotating body lifting/lowering unit 300 includes a box-shaped container 330 in which a plurality of (three in this embodiment) are arranged in parallel in the width direction, and a plurality (in this embodiment, two) of box-shaped containers 330 accommodated in each container 330 respectively. ) (a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b).

The plurality of containers 330 are each formed to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and are visible to the player through the opening. be done.

The first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotatably supported by the housing body 330, and as a result of their rotation, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are sequentially visible to the player. let Note that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies with a triangular cross section, and different shapes are drawn on three surfaces of the outer periphery.

In this embodiment, the drive source for the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is shared by one drive motor 350, and while it is possible to reduce parts costs, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body By making the combinations of the figures 340b changeable, a total of nine combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Note that details will be described later.

The central floating unit 400 includes a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose proximal ends are rotatably supported by the base body 410, and distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 opposite to the proximal ends. and a first member 440 connected to each other so as to be relatively displaceable.

The pair of arm bodies 430 are each driven by separate drive motors 450 and are formed to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. As a result, the first member 440 can be moved not only linearly up and down along the vertical direction, but also in a combination of linear motion and rotational motion, and can be moved up and down while incorporating the free movement, The movement of the first member 440 can be varied (see FIGS. 31 to 34). Note that details will be described later.

The left-right rotation unit 500 includes base bodies (back base 511 and front base 512) disposed in front of the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotating body lifting unit 300 and the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410. and a displacement member 530 whose base end side is rotatably supported. The displacement member 530 has two positions: a retracted position where it is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 7), and an extended position where it is retracted into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). (see Figure 8). In this case, the displacement member 530 is arranged in the extended position so that it can come into contact with the first member 440 and restrict its movement (see FIG. 41). Note that details will be described later.

The left and right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 that are arranged on the left and right sides with the opening 211a of the back case 210 interposed therebetween. These first sensor 610 and second sensor 620 are formed as optical sensors that include a light emitting part that irradiates light and a light receiving part that receives light irradiated from the light emitting part and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). , is formed so as to be able to detect the presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16.

The first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall part 211 of the back case 210. Ru. In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined position with the light emitting part and the light receiving part facing inward. Therefore, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be disposed at a position deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (a position on the outside in the width direction) across the opening, so that it is not visible to the player. You can make it difficult to be attacked.

Next, detailed configurations of the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central floating unit 400, the left-right rotation unit 500, and the left-right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 46. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting/lowering unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for elevating the central container 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. It is formed from three units. The left unit 300L is stacked on the front side of the center unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the center unit 300C, so that three containers 330 are arranged in parallel in the width direction.

Here, detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, left unit 300L, and right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes a back base 311 that is L-shaped in front view, a front base 312 that is overlapped on the front side of the back base 311, and a front base 312 that is overlapped on the front side of the front base 312. A drive motor 320 is provided, a storage body 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and a first rotating body 340a and a first rotary body 340a housed in the housing body 330. It mainly includes two rotating bodies 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between opposing surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to a drive shaft of a drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface of a flat plate-like member, and the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side and a storage body 330 is disposed on the other side. A connecting member 325 is provided.

A pair of shafts protrudes from the front of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front of the rear base 311 with the guiding direction being the up-down direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 12). ) and the container 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (elevated) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion where the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically elongated portion where the container 330 is disposed at their lower end sides with the horizontally elongated portion. It is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even if the left container 330 is placed in the lowered position and the center container 330 is placed in the raised position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 can be positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. , it is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

Note that the slide guide 351 is a linear guide consisting of a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a sliding body that is formed to be slidable along the guide groove and is fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R, which will be described later. Further, the slide guide 352 includes a first rail fixed to the back base 311, a second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the container 330, and a slide guide 352 interposed between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescoping linear guide mechanism consisting of an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left container 330 is arranged side by side (left side in FIG. 12) of the center container 330 (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (in the left-right direction in FIG. ) dimensions become longer. Furthermore, as described above, since the horizontally elongated portion is interposed to avoid visual recognition from the player, the connecting member 325 is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swings in the left-right direction tend to occur).

In contrast, in this embodiment, a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is provided on the back side of the central container 330, so that the central container 330 is placed in the raised position. However, the extended slide guide 352 can restrict the swinging in the left-right direction and stabilize the posture of the central storage body 330. On the other hand, when the central container 330 is placed in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being seen by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be explained with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a back base 313 that is vertically elongated when viewed from the front and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C; An intermediate base 314 stacked on the front side, a front base 315 stacked on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. A housing body 330 that is raised and lowered relative to each base 313 to 315 by the housing body 330, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330, and a housing body 330 housed between the opposing surfaces of each base 313 to 315. and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. , a rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface of a flat member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

A shaft is provided protruding from the front of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. Further, a shaft support hole is bored in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed and rotatably supported in the shaft support hole.

A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front of the rear base 313 with the guiding direction being in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by this slide guide 351. . Furthermore, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated opening, is provided in the guide plate 353 and extends in the vertical direction. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear movement of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (raised and lowered) together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be explained with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 which is formed in a substantially L-shape from the front and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C; A front base 317 overlapped with the front side of the rear base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and a drive force of the drive motor 320 to move up and down with respect to the rear base 316 and the front base 317. A first rotary body 340a and a second rotary body 340b housed in the housing body 330 are housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 316 and the front base 317, and accommodate the driving force of the drive motor 320. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting information to the body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a flat plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. It includes a rack gear 324 formed as a rack with gears cut on its side, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to a housing 330.

A shaft is provided protruding from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front of the rear base 316 with the guiding direction being in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by this slide guide 351. . Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is provided extending along the vertical direction. (not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rotation of the rack gear 324 is Along with the linear movement, the container 330 is vertically displaced (elevated) together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swinging in the left-right direction tends to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surface of the left housing body 330 and the right housing body 330, the width of the connecting members 326, 327 (Figs. 14 and 16 The rigidity can be increased by shortening the horizontal (left and right) dimensions. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the postures of the left and right containers 330 (make them difficult to swing in the left and right directions).

Accordingly, there is no need to provide a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right containers 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a, 316a of the back base 316 can be used for guidance. The posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, parts costs can be reduced.

Next, the container 330 and the first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b accommodated in the container 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18(a) is a side view of the container 330 as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the container 330 as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). It is. Note that FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 includes a base body 331, left and right side walls 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and an inner surface of the left side wall body 332. The main body 331 has a partition wall body 334 and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331, and these parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The base body 331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side of the page in FIG. 18(b)), the upper surface, and the lower surface (the upper side and the lower side in FIG. 18(b)) of the container 330, and is made by combining three plate-shaped members. It is formed in one piece. A reflection section RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front side of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330 .

The reflecting portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that projects from the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at least in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18(b)).

The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members that form the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and are provided with holding holes 332a and 333a at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, which will be described later, are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 non-rotatably. Note that the holding holes 332a and 333a have a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the inner circumferential surface of the holding holes 332a, 333a, which is a circular shape with one section separated by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line removed.

The partition wall body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same external shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall body 332. Further, the partition wall body 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front side of the housing body 330, and is formed into a frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually confirm the rotation mode of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The container 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and a driving A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 that mesh with the drive gear 351 in this order. A gear train consisting of: The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

Note that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the shapes drawn on the outer circumferential surfaces are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a will be used as a representative example. The second rotating body 340b will be explained as follows, and the explanation of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end plates 342 rotatably supported on both axial ends (shaft portions 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and It mainly includes three display boards (a first display board 343A, a second display board 343B, and a third display board 343C) installed between the end plates 342.

The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and a shaft portion 341b connected to both ends of the body portion 341a in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a part that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332, 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 330, and connects a pair of shaft parts 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft parts 341a. A body portion 341b is provided.

The shaft portion 341b has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to its axis that is a circular shape that is divided by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line and removing one section (a shape in which a part of the outer circumferential surface of the cylinder is chamfered with a flat surface). The holding holes 332a, 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332, 333 have a similar shape, which is slightly smaller. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341b into the holding holes 332a, 333a of the side wall bodies 332, 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be held non-rotatably in the housing body 330 (side wall bodies 332, 333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated onto the inner surfaces of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C.

In this case, when the shaft 341a of the body 341b is inserted into the holding holes 332a, 333a of the side walls 332, 333 and is held unrotatably, the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is directed to the front surface of the container 330 (the decorative body 335). The opening 335a is arranged in a posture (rotated position) facing the opening 335a (the surface on the near side of the paper in FIG. 18(b)). Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the light emitted from the LED 344 onto the inner surface of the display board located on the front side of the container 330 (the "visible position" to be described later) among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. can.

Note that the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends opened in the axial direction, so the internal space is used to route the wiring of the LED 344 and to route the wiring around the axis. It can be drawn out of the container 330 from the opening at the end. Further, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 cannot rotate with respect to the housing 330, so even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, no external force such as twisting or pulling will act on the wiring of the LED 344. can be avoided.

The end plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342 having a circular cross section perpendicular to the axis is bored in the center. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341. Thereby, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the container 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

Here, since the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side walls 332, 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side walls 332 and 333 via the end plate 342.

A first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342, and a base gear 361 of the detection mechanism, which will be described later, is fixed to the other. In addition, although the second gear 355 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, the attachment of the base gear 361 to the other side is omitted (see FIG. 17 and FIG. (see 18).

The first display board 343A to the third display board 343C are plate-shaped members each having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, a pair of It is installed between the end plates 342, and forms a triangular prism-shaped body together with the end plates 342.

Each of the first to third display plates 343A to 343C has a figure drawn on its outer surface. Therefore, when the triangular prism body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display boards 343A to 343C are sequentially made visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decoration body 335.

At least a portion of the outer surface of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C is curved into an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) in the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display plate 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of ~343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

Note that in this embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape convex outward; The center portion in the width direction is formed into a substantially flat surface. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the radius of the arc of the curved arc-shaped portion is set to a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display panel 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times (below).

Here, in the following, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the near side of the paper in FIG. 18(b)) is used as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism body is rotated. The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decoration body 335 is referred to as the "visible position". The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is not visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as the "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display board 343A is placed at the visible position, the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C are placed at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). . When the triangular prism-shaped body is rotated by 120 degrees in the forward or reverse direction from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display plate The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at a shielding position.

In this case, in this embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed in a form that does not transmit light in its entirety, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C have a transmitting portion PN through which light can pass. It is formed with a part of it. Further, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is provided on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where it can illuminate the inner surface of the display board located at the visible position of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, when the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is placed at the visible position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transparent part PN of each display board 343B, 343C and is directly visible to the player. can be done.

On the other hand, when the first display board 343A is placed at the visible position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)), the light emitted from the LED 344 is The light is reflected by the reflective part RF of the base 331 of the container 330, and then reflected by the reflective part RF of the base 331 of the container 330. This can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at a rotational position where the first display plate 343A is placed at a visible position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflection part RF in the base body 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The player can be reminded of the figure on the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C, which is placed in a position that is invisible to the player (shielded position). This can make the player expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a will be rotated to a position where the graphics on the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C are visible.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed with a triangular cross section, when each rotating body 340a, 340b is rotated, the reflection plate The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display board 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (vertical distance in FIG. 18(b)), or The apparent diameter of each rotating body 340a, 340b (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(b)) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display plate 343A to 343C) is opposed to the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transparent part PN as reflected light from the reflective part RF of the base 441, is aware of the reflected light. The aspect (for example, the size of the area where the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 17 and 18. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. The terminal gear 363 includes a detection plate 363a extending outward in the direction, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detection plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

The intermediate gear 362 and the terminal gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 with the detection region disposed on the movement locus of the detection target plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection shape of the detection target plate 363a. That is, based on the detection results of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at arbitrary positions).

Next, the rotational operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be explained. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both of these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Further, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Furthermore, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the above-described case.

As a result, the combination of the graphics of the first rotating body 340a and the graphics of the second rotating body 340b that are visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, in the conventional product, the number of combinations of the shapes of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b was limited to three.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven synchronously by one drive motor, a possible combination is, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two rotating bodies 340a is placed at the display position, and a second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340a are placed in the display position. There were only three combinations: a second combination in which the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and a third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a are disposed at the display position.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated independently by different drive motors, it is possible to form up to nine combinations, and the combinations can be It can be made to appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, two drive motors are required, resulting in an increase in parts cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while keeping the number of drive motors 350 to one, it is possible to form nine combinations of the shapes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be It can be made to appear arbitrarily. Furthermore, in this embodiment, nine combinations can be quickly created by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation in the rotational positions without requiring the rotational positions of the first rotational body 340a and the second rotational body 340b to completely match. You can make it come out. The combination of the figures of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. (a) to FIG. 21(e) are shown in FIG. 22(a) to 22(e) are in the states shown as No. 1 to 5 in FIG. They correspond to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

In addition, in FIG. 20, as a combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is placed at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "A" or "A'". The state where the second display board 343B is placed at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "B" or "B'", and the state where the third display board 343C is located at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "C" or "C'", respectively. be done.

For example, No. 20 in FIG. 10 "A, C'" is a state in which the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at visible positions, and the first rotating body A figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and a figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b respectively correspond to the state that is visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by “A to C”, and the second The first to third display plates 343A to 343C of the rotating body 340a are illustrated using symbols "A' to C'," respectively.

Here, the numbers of teeth of the first gear 353 and second gear 355 fixed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated 108 degrees. It is formed to

No. 20 in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21(a), from the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the visible position (No. 1 in FIG. 20). 1 "A', A", first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and its second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at a visible position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, since the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees while the first rotating body 340a rotates 120 degrees, there is a difference (shift) of 12 degrees in the rotational position of the two, but each rotating body 340a , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in rotation angle of 12 degrees. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of 343B are respectively arranged at visible positions (a second combination is formed).

In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first to third display plates 343A to 343C are curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (that is, the surface on which the figures are drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each rotating body 340a, 340b), so that it is difficult for the player who looks straight at the figures drawn on the outer surface of each of these display boards 343A to 343C to , it may be difficult to recognize the difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

No. 20 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in No. 2 and FIG. 21(b) and the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, No. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21(c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a rotational position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so the player is made to recognize the misalignment of the shapes (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. 20 in FIG. 20 from the state shown in No. 4 and FIG. 21(d). 9 and the state shown in FIG. 22(d), the first rotating body 340a disposes each display plate 343A to 343C at a visible position every 120 degrees of rotation, while the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the deviation of the figures (the combination is not established, No. 4 "-, A" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20).

No. 20 in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22(d) (No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20), when the first rotary body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, as shown in FIG. 20 no. 10 and FIG. 22(e), the second rotating body 340b places the third display plate 343C at a visible position. As a result, the third combination (No. 10 "C', A" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

According to the present embodiment, the second rotation is performed even in the section where a figure deviation (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visible to the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figures will be combined in the third combination.

Thereafter, the process is substantially the same as that described above (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21(a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22(e)). The aspect is repeated two more times to complete a cycle (the table is cycled from start to end).

In this case, No. 20 in FIG. 11～No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be changed by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 "A', A fifth combination (No. 12 "B', C" in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20 "C', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Also, No. 20 in FIG. 21~No. In the section of the state shown in No. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 "A', C"), an eighth combination (No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20), and a ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b includes a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). The rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation period of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of the shapes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (as desired). any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce parts costs, improve durability and reliability, and ensure that each gear is always meshed. Therefore, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse directions, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched.

Therefore, for example, by proceeding through the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) where a figure deviation (combination is not established) is formed is detected. Then, after or just before the third combination (No. 10 "C', A" in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. The series of actions of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby making it possible to create an effect that makes the player expect the third combination to appear.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) is developed. In addition to advancing the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, the table in FIG. 20 is also advanced in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20) It is also possible to proceed to , and to reveal a ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, it is necessary to repeat the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a once. Since all you have to do is to do this, you can quickly create a desired combination of figures.

Here, in the case where the second rotating body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is replaced by the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, when set to "1/integer" times), it is possible to form a plurality of combinations of figures without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. I can do it. However, in this case, the maximum number of possible combinations of figures is three.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 1 in FIG. 20) are used. 21 "A', C"), in the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (shift) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. This allows the number of possible combinations of figures to be nine.

That is, in a structure in which the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, setting the number of possible combinations of shapes to nine means that the rotation of the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotary body 340a. This cannot be achieved simply by forming a transmission mechanism for transmitting data to each of the first and second rotating bodies 340b as a gear train. This became possible for the first time by allowing a difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures, and at the same time to suppress the required number of drive motors 350 and to reduce product costs.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combination), the stopping positions at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth, and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20, No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A"), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only in the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at a rotational position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21(a). , for example, to stop at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. Thereby, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b, thereby making it less noticeable.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 "C', A", No. 20 "C', B" and No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20), , as shown in FIG. 22(e), since the second rotating body 340b is preceded in phase, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only in the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at a rotational position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22(d). , for example, to stop at a rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. Thereby, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b, thereby making it less noticeable.

As described above, the rotating body elevating unit 300 is formed so that each housing body 300 can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved up and down from the game board 13. It can be placed on the back of the player to make it invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the graphics of the first rotating body 340a and the graphics of the second rotating body 340b can be quickly displayed at the required timing.

That is, in this embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b relatively many times, and the time increases accordingly.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by arranging each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be evacuated to a position where they are invisible to the player. I can do it. As a result, the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated to a predetermined rotational position in advance without the player being aware of the rotation. When the timing has arrived, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are performed to quickly create the desired combination. can be made to appear.

Note that the placement of each container 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stopping of rotation) is relatively short, each accommodation body 300 is not placed in the lowered position, and each While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a, 340b is started and stopped at a position that is visible to the player, the time from the start of the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a, 340b to the display of the result (stopping of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, each rotating body 340a, 340b may be rotated in advance at a position that is invisible to the player.

In this case, in this embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated, so even if they are moved to the lowered position and are no longer visible to the player, the There is a possibility that the generated sound may make the player recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are being rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when the predetermined operating means is operating, it is possible to incorporate the rotation into the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Note that, as the operating means, for example, the dispensing device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) are exemplified. When these operating means are operated, a relatively loud sound is generated, for example, in conjunction with the discharging of the ball, the output of sound, or the firing of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in advance.

In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b It may also be possible to perform prior rotation. When the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined performance, since the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined performance, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the body 340b in advance.

Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 includes a base body 410 disposed on the bottom wall 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a base body 410 disposed in front of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose proximal ends are rotatably supported between opposing surfaces of the cover bodies 420 and the base body 410, and which are disposed with their distal ends facing each other; It mainly includes a first member 440 to which the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are connected to each other so as to be relatively displaceable, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

The base body 410 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and cover bodies 420 are partially disposed (covered) at both ends of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. In the mutually opposing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the proximal end side (rotation shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are recessed at coaxial positions, respectively. will be established.

Furthermore, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 453 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is protruded from the front surface of the base body 410. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove prevents the crank gear 453 from coming off the shaft 412. .

A notch 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 to provide a space for allowing the arm body 430 to rotate. On the other hand, if the rotation of the arm member 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the rotation of the arm member 420 beyond the predetermined angle can be restricted by bringing the inner edge of the opening of the notch 422 into contact with the outer surface of the arm member 430. is formed. That is, the cover body 420 is formed to be able to function as a stopper that restricts rotation of the arm member 420 beyond a predetermined angle.

Note that a rotating body 413 is disposed at the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotating body 413 is a member that is formed to be rotatable by the driving force of a drive motor (not shown), and when the first member 440 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 31(a)), the first member 440 is rotated. When the first member 440 is placed in the lowered position (FIG. 31(c)), the first member 440 is placed vertically in parallel above the first member 440, and the player cannot see it. visible to the public.

The arm body 430 is an elongated rod-shaped body bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotation shaft 431 is a shaft supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and coaxially protrudes from the front and back surfaces of the base end side of the arm body 430, respectively. be done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in such a manner that the distal end side thereof is raised and lowered in the vertical direction about the rotation axis 431 as a rotation center.

The driven groove 432 is a portion into which an eccentric pin 454 (described later) of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and is a linear (elongated hole in front view) extending from the bent portion of the arm body 430 toward the rotating shaft 431. shape) is formed as an opening. As will be described later, as the crank gear 453 rotates, the eccentric pin 454 slides along the driven groove 432, thereby rotating the arm body 430 about the rotation shaft 431.

The connecting pin 433 is a rod-shaped body that protrudes from the front side of the distal end of the arm body 430, and is slidably inserted along a sliding groove 441a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. Via this connecting pin 433, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected so as to be relatively movable.

Note that a collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 during the assembly process of the first member 430, as will be described later. is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off from the sliding groove 441a. Further, a rotating body 434 is disposed on the front side of the arm body 430 at a position opposite to the driven groove 432 across the bent portion. The rotating body 434 is formed to be rotatable by the driving force of a driving motor 435 disposed on the back side of the arm body 430.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the mounting plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. It mainly includes a pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 located eccentrically from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453.

The mounting plate 451 is disposed on the front of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is housed between the opposing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 projects from the front of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. Note that the tip of the eccentric pin 454 is provided with a fitting groove into which an E ring (retaining ring) can be fitted, and the retaining ring fitted in the fitting groove allows the eccentric pin 454 to be removed from the driven groove 432. Regulate escape.

According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), An eccentric pin 454 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced in the vertical direction in front view while drawing an arcuate trajectory. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed upward or pushed downward by the eccentric pin 454 sliding in the driven groove 432, and rotated about the rotating shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is connected to the arm body 430 so as to be relatively displaceable via the connecting pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independently connected to each other. By being rotated, as will be described later, it is possible to move in a manner that combines linear motion and rotational motion (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, the detailed configuration of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 includes a base body 441, a front body 442 and a back body 443 disposed on the front and back sides of the base body 441, respectively, and a rotatable structure on the back surface of the base body 441. Mainly, the arm member 444 provided, a drive motor 445 that generates a driving force for rotating the arm member 444, and a crank member 446 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444. Be prepared.

The base body 441 is a member forming the skeleton of the first member 440, and is formed into a circular plate shape when viewed from the front. A pair of sliding grooves 441a are formed in the base body 441. Each sliding groove 441a is formed as an opening in the shape of a long hole when viewed from the front, extending linearly, and a pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged non-parallel. Specifically, when the base body 441 is viewed from the front, the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in an inverted V-shape that is inclined upwardly from the center toward both ends.

On the back surface of the base body 441, a cylindrical cylindrical portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is protruded. be done.

A connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the cylindrical portion 441b. That is, since the connecting pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 441b, the supporting area of the connecting pin 433 can be expanded accordingly, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. .

The front body 442 is a member that forms the front face of the first member 440, and is formed in the shape of a disk, which is circular in front view and has approximately the same diameter as the base body 441, and has a predetermined thickness. The front body 442 is formed from a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in this embodiment) are arranged inside the front body 442. Therefore, by causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light (turn on or blink), the light that has passed through the front surface and outer circumferential surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated outward from the front surface and outer circumferential surface. Thereby, the entire front body 442 (the front surface and the outer peripheral surface) can be visually recognized by the player as if it were emitting light.

Note that the front body 442 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on the base body 441 after the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base body 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base body 441 from the back side, and at least the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441 is inserted into the tip of the connecting pin 433 that protrudes toward the front side of the base body 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is attached (fastened and fixed), and this collar prevents the connecting pin 433 from coming off from the base body 441.

The arm member 444 is an elongated member that is longer than the diameter of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444a is a hole that is pivotally supported by the shaft 441a of the front body 441, and is bored at the center of the arm member 444 in the longitudinal direction. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and has a straight line ( It is formed as an opening with an elongated hole shape when viewed from the front.

The arm member 444 is rotatably supported on a shaft 441a between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, with both end portions extending outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23). As the crank member 446 rotates, the eccentric pin 446b slides along the driven groove 444b, thereby rotating around the shaft support hole 444b.

The crank member 446 is a member disposed between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, and includes a rotating body 446a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445, and a rotation center of the rotating body 446a (the center of rotation of the rotating body 446a). and an eccentric pin 446b positioned eccentrically from the drive shaft. The eccentric pin 446b projects from the front of the rotating body 446a and is inserted into the driven groove 444b of the arm member 444.

When the rotating body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus with a predetermined radius. As a result, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled left and right by the eccentric pin 446b, and the shaft support hole 444a is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in this embodiment) in the forward and reverse directions. The arm member 444 is rotated around the shaft 441c (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

As a result, as will be described later, the movement of the arm members 444 can be made visible to the player in such a manner that both end portions of the arm members 444 that protrude left and right from both sides of the front body 442 are reciprocated up and down in an alternating manner. . Furthermore, by performing the reciprocating movement of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, a reaction force (inertia force) of the reciprocating movement is applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442, and the arm body 430 is This allows the player to visually recognize the relative displacement of the front body 442.

Next, the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. Note that a pair of left-right rotation units 500 are arranged on the left and right sides with the opening 211a of the back case 210 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 6), and these pairs of left-right rotation units 500 are formed in a left-right symmetrical shape. Since they are formed with substantially the same configuration except for the above, only one (the one disposed on the left side in front view) will be explained, and the explanation of the other will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a front view of the left-right rotation unit 500. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left-right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left-right rotation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left-right rotation unit 500 includes a back base 511 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 512 superimposed on the front side of the back base 511, and a front base 513 disposed in front of the front base 513. a cover body 513 provided, a drive motor 520 provided on the back side of the back base 511, a displacement member 530 rotated with respect to the back base 511 and the front base 512 by the driving force of the drive motor 520; It mainly includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530.

Support holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotary shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed in the mutually opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the cover body 513 at coaxial positions, respectively. will be established. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotating shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted, and an opening 512b through which an eccentric pin 542 of a crank gear 540 (described later) of the transmission mechanism is inserted.

The displacement member 530 is a member with a feather-shaped decoration on the front, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft supported by the shaft support holes 511a and 513a of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, and the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft that is supported by the support holes 511a and 513a of the back base 511 and the cover body 513. They are coaxially protruded from each other. The displacement member 530 is rotatable around the rotation axis 531 between a retracted position where it overlaps the front base 512 in front view and an extended position where it extends toward the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) of the rear case 210. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

The driven hole 432 is a hole in which a connecting pin 552 of a link member 550 (described later) of the transmission mechanism is rotatably supported, and is recessed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the rotating shaft 531 toward the distal end side. As described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, so that the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520. It mainly includes a crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530.

The crank gear 540 is a gear rotatably held between opposing surfaces of the rear base 511 and the front base 512, and has an eccentric pin 541 protruding toward the front at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. The link member 550 is a rod-shaped body disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530, and has a connecting hole 551 recessed in the back surface on one end in the longitudinal direction, and has a connecting hole 551 in the back surface on the other end in the longitudinal direction. A connecting pin 552 is provided to protrude from the front surface of.

The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably supported in the connecting hole 551 of the link member 550 through the opening 512b of the front base 512, and the connecting pin 552 of the link member 550 is connected to the driven hole of the displacement member 530. 532 and is rotatably supported. Thereby, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550, and a crank mechanism is configured.

According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), The eccentric pin 541 eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate trajectory, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the proximal end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. As a result, the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotating shaft 431 between the retracted position and the extended position described above (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 31 to 41. In the following, for convenience of explanation, those located on the left side (left side in FIG. 31) and right side (right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front with respect to the pair of arm bodies 430 are respectively referred to as They will be referred to as a "left" arm body 430 and a "right" arm body 430.

31(a) to 31(c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, with FIG. 31(a) showing it in the raised position, and FIG. 31(b) showing it in the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 31(c) corresponds to a state in which they are placed in between, and FIG. 31(c) corresponds to a state in which they are placed in a lowered position.

32(a) to 32(c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, where FIG. 32(a) is the same as that in FIG. 31(a), and FIG. 32(b) is the same as that in FIG. 31(b). 32(c) corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG. 31(c), respectively.

Note that FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c) correspond to cross-sectional views in which the back surface of the first member 440 is viewed by cutting along a plane perpendicular to the connecting pin 433. Further, while the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines, illustration of the back body 443, drive motor 450, and crank member 446 is omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 35, 36, 38, and 40, which will be described later, so the description thereof will be omitted below.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 32(a), when the central floating unit 400 is placed in the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing their tips (connecting pin 433 side) upward. posture, and the first member 440 is positioned at the uppermost position. The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are located close to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as "outer terminal ends") of the respective sliding grooves 441a on the side closer to the radial outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

From the state shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 32(a), when the pair of drive motors 450 are each rotationally driven and each crank gear 453 is rotated, the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 is moved into the driven groove 433. While sliding, push down the left and right arm bodies 430, respectively.

As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated about the rotation axis 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31(b) and 32(b). Displaced. From this state, when each crank gear 453 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed down, as shown in FIGS. 31(c) and 32(c). , the central floating unit 400 is placed in the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 31(c) and 32(c), when the central floating unit 400 is placed in the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing their tips (connecting pin 433 side) downward. A state is formed in which the first member 440 is located at the lowermost position and protrudes toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Further, above the first member 440, the rotating body 413 is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are located close to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as "inner terminal ends") of the respective sliding grooves 441a on the side closer to the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In this embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end in the lowered position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the raised position.

As a result, as will be described later, when the first member 440 is displaced relative to the arm member 430 by utilizing the action of inertia or the movement of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the lowered position The amount of relative displacement at can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

When the pair of drive motors 450 are rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIGS. 31(c) and 32(c) (lowered position), as each crank gear 453 rotates, As the eccentric pin 454 slides in the driven groove 432 and pushes up the left and right arm bodies 430, the central floating unit is finally moved as shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 32(c). 400 is placed in the raised position.

In this way, according to the central floating unit 400, the first member 440 can be raised and lowered between the raised position and the lower position. However, the above operation described as an example of raising and lowering the first member 440 is such that the first member 440 linearly moves between the raised position and the lowered position while maintaining the same posture. There is little change in movement.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the respective distal ends (connecting pins 433) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected to the first Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (slidable), the first member 440 can be moved up and down while changing its movement according to the rotation mode of the left and right arm bodies 430. can. An example of such operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c) and 34(a) to 34(c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, with FIG. 33(a) showing the central floating unit 400 in the raised position. 33(b), FIG. 33(c), FIG. 10(a), and FIG. 10(b) are placed between the raised position and the lowered position, and FIG. 10(c) is placed in the lowered position. Each corresponds to the state.

Moreover, FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c) and FIGS. 36(a) to 36(c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c) are 33(a) to 33(c), respectively, and FIGS. 36(a) to 36(c) correspond to the center floating unit 400 in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(c). Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 35(a), from the state where the central floating unit 400 is placed in the raised position, only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven to (Connecting pin 433) rotates the right arm body 430 in the direction of rotation in which it moves downward (downward in FIG. 33(a)) (hereinafter, this rotation will be referred to as "downward rotation").

Due to this downward rotation of the right arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35(a)) arm body 430 pushes down the sliding groove 441a, and as shown in FIG. 33(b) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 35(b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to a position with the right shoulder lowered.

Here, as shown in FIG. 237(a), the left (right side in FIG. 35(a)) arm body 430 in the stopped state is in the raised position between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. A predetermined gap is formed between the two. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (tilted) to a position with the right shoulder lowered (left shoulder lowered in FIG. 35(b)), the sliding groove 441a to which the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected becomes steeper, and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged in a direction that allows movement (fall) of the first member 440 due to the action of gravity. .

Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the raised position shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 35(a), the first member 440 of the right arm body 430 will be While the first member 440 can be displaced by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotational position, the first member 440 is free-falled by the action of gravity to the state shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 35(b). can be placed.

That is, the first member 440, which was driven by the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 until the right arm body 430 reached a predetermined rotation position, is moved by the right rotation after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Rather than being caused to follow the downward rotation of the arm body 430, it can be rapidly displaced downward by free fall and precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be varied.

When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 35(b), the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35(b)) arm body 430 slides. By pushing the moving groove 441a further downward, the downward-sloping posture of the first member 40 to the right can be changed (tilted) to an even steeper angle, as shown in FIGS. 33(c) and 35(c). .

In this case, the left (right side in FIG. 35(b)) arm body 430 is in a stopped state and the connecting pin 433 has reached the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. The first member 440 can be rotated around the right side (in (b)), and as the right arm body 430 rotates downward, the first member 440 is rotated around the left arm body 430 side (when viewed from the front). It is possible to form a state in which it is pushed to the left side in FIG. 33).

That is, in the process from the raised position shown in FIG. 33(a) to the state shown in FIG. 33(c), as the right arm body 430 rotates downward, the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. ), rotational movement in the direction of downward movement to the right (clockwise in Figure 33), and linear movement to the left (leftward in Figure 33). It can change the movement.

When the state shown in FIGS. 33(c) and 35(c) is reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is also located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the left (left side in FIG. 33(c)) arm body 430 is then rotated downward.

Due to this downward rotation of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 35(c)) arm body 430 pushes down the sliding groove 441a, and as a result, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from a posture with its right shoulder down to a horizontal posture.

In an example of the operation described here, the left arm body 430 is moved further downward from the state shown in FIGS. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 36(a)) arm body 430 further pushes down the sliding groove 441a, and as a result, contrary to the case described above (see FIG. 33), As shown in FIG. 36(b) and FIG. 36(b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to a posture with the left shoulder lowered.

When the state shown in FIGS. 34(b) and 36(b) is reached, the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowest position, and further downward rotation is restricted, so from this state, Next, the right (left side in FIG. 34(b)) arm body 430 is rotated downward to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 36(c), the first member 40 changes (returns) from the left shoulder downward posture to the horizontal posture and is placed in the lowest position. I can do it. That is, it is placed in the lowered position.

As described above, according to the central movable unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the respective tip sides (connected Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (slidable), by displacing the left and right arm bodies 430 independently of each other, the first member 440 can be moved linearly. It is possible to give a movement that combines rotational movement and rotational movement, and it is possible to change the movement.

In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 have their proximal ends (rotation shafts 431) rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and are rotated about the base ends. Each of the distal end sides (connecting pins 433) of 430 can be moved along arcuate trajectories whose center positions differ from each other. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are slid and displaced in a straight line, a movement that is a more complex combination of linear movement and rotational movement can be applied to the first member 440, and a larger change can be achieved. You can give to that movement.

Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 disposed at the raised position or the lowered position can be moved by inertia with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. (effect of inertia) allows for relative displacement. The displacement of the first member 440 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, taking the displacement in the lowered position as an example.

37(a) to 37(c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 37(a), the state in which the first member 440 is located in the center is b) and FIG. 37(c) each illustrate a state in which the first member 440 is swayed from side to side from the state shown in FIG. 37(a).

Moreover, FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c) are the views shown in FIGS. Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 37(a) and 38(a), in the lowered position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is connected to each sliding groove of the first member 440. 441a, at a position with a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end of 441a. Therefore, even if the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be allowed by the amount of the above-mentioned gap.

For example, by displacing (rotating) one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 at a predetermined speed and then stopping them, the inertia force generated due to the stoppage is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 is A reciprocating displacement toward the outer end or inner end of the sliding groove 441a can be formed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is caused to reciprocate (swing) left and right by inertia (action of inertia). You can change the movement.

In this case, in this embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are each formed linearly and are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and the sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are When displacing the first member 440 relative to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (action of inertia), a rotational component can be imparted to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated from side to side (swinging) not only by linear motion but also by a combination of linear motion and rotational motion, and as a result, the movement of the first member 440 changes. can be given.

Furthermore, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a straight line, when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a with the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430, resistance is reduced. It can be controlled and slid smoothly. Thereby, the displacement of the first member 440 accompanying the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load on each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially V-shape, after the horizontal reciprocation of the first member 440 converges and stops, the first member 440 remains in the stopped state. Member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, when the central floating unit 400 is evacuated to the raised position and is on standby when other units or display devices perform performances, it is possible to suppress the first member 440 from shaking with respect to the arm body 430 due to external disturbances. . As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, reciprocating the first member 440 from side to side by inertia (action of inertia) after the arm body 430 stops means that the first member maintains the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. With a structure in which the left and right arm bodies 430 can only be displaced in a straight line (i.e., a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be displaced independently), it is impossible to displace the left and right arm bodies 430 independently as in this embodiment. This was made possible only by making it possible. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be varied.

In other words, in a structure (conventional product) in which the first member only moves linearly between the raised position and the lowered position while maintaining the same posture, even if the arm body is stopped, the first member is not acted upon as the arm body is stopped. This inertial force cannot trigger the first member to reciprocate from side to side (swinging).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, from the state in which the first member 440 is in an inclined posture, one arm body 430 remains in a stopped state and only the other arm body 430 is displaced (rotated). Since the first member 440 can be placed at the reference position (for example, the lowered position) (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the inertial force caused by the stoppage of the other arm body 430 can be absorbed by reciprocating the first member 440 from side to side (rolling horizontally). ) can be used as an opportunity to do so. As a result, it is possible to reliably cause the first member 440 to reciprocate from side to side, and to increase the amplitude of the reciprocating movement from side to side.

Here, the lowered position was explained as an example of a position where the first member 440 is caused to reciprocate (swing) left and right with inertia (action of inertia) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, but it can be understood from the above structure. As can be seen, other positions are also possible. That is, when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, any position where there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer and inner ends of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 can be used. It may be the position of Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated not only at the raised position or the lowered position but also at any position between the raised position and the lowered position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (i.e., a position where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

Next, the operation of reciprocating (swinging) the first member 440 to the left and right by utilizing the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of this embodiment, even after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right due to the above-mentioned inertia (action of inertia) has converged, the first member 440 can be moved between the left and right arm bodies 430. It can be moved back and forth from side to side without rotating.

39(a) to 39(c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 39(a), the state in which the first member 440 is located in the center is b) and FIG. 39(c) each illustrate a state in which the first member 440 is swayed from side to side from the state shown in FIG. 39(a).

Moreover, FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c) are the views of FIGS. Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), in the lowered position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is connected to the first member 440 as described above. The sliding groove 441a is arranged at a position with a gap between the outer end and the inner end of each of the sliding grooves 441a. Therefore, even if the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be allowed by the amount of the above-mentioned gap.

That is, in the first member 440, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base body 441, by displacing (rotating) the arm member 444 by the driving force of the drive motor 445, the reaction force is transferred to the base body 441. By the action of the reaction force, each connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or inner end of each sliding groove 441a. As a result, even if the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (swinging) left and right.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members By rotating the arm member 444 clockwise (clockwise) when viewed from the front as shown in FIGS. 39(b) and 40(b) from the neutral position of the arm member 444, the reaction force 39(c) and 40(c), the arm member 444 can be rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Rotate clockwise.

Thereby, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front due to the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (swinging) left and right, and its movement can be varied.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the arm member 444 is rotatably supported on the base body 441 and rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445, so that the first member 440 responds to the displacement of the arm member 444. The accompanying reaction force can be made easier to act on the base body 441 and the front body 442 in the rotational direction. As a result, it is possible to easily generate a rotational component in the movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (axis 441c of the base body 441) is located at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430, the rotational center of the arm member 444 is The force can be easily connected to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (base body 441 and front body 442).

Here, the lowered position has been described as an example of a position where the first member 440 is reciprocated (swinging) left and right due to the reaction force when the arm member 444 rotates, but as can be understood from the above configuration, other positions may be used. It is also possible in position. That is, when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, any position where there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer and inner ends of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 can be used. It may be the position of Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated not only at the raised position or the lowered position but also at any position between the raised position and the lowered position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (i.e., a position where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

Here, a sensor device for detecting the posture of the first member 440 may be provided, and control may be performed to change the rotational state of the arm member 444 based on the detection result of the sensor device. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged, or the first member 440 can be reciprocated (swinging) left and right.

For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates (sideways) relative to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). (See FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocating movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is is applied in a direction that cancels out the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442). Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

Alternatively, the first member 440 may be moved from a state where the movement of the first member 440 has converged and stopped, or from a state where the first member 440 is reciprocating (swinging) from side to side due to inertia (action of inertia). The arm member 444 is rotated so as to cause the base body 441 and the front body 442 to reciprocate or to intensify the reciprocating motion (a direction in which the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is amplified in the movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442) ). Thereby, the first member 440 can be reciprocated from side to side, and the reciprocating movement from side to side of the first member 440 can be varied depending on the rotational state of the arm member 444.

Note that the sensor may be an acceleration sensor (for example, , a capacitance type, a piezo type, etc.), a distance sensor that detects the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440 (for example, a triangulation type, a time-of-flight type, etc.). The distance sensors are provided at at least two locations and configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base body 441 and front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

Next, the cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

41(a) is a front view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotating unit 500, FIG. 41(b) is a top view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotating unit 500, and FIG. 41(c) is a top view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotating unit 500. , is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 taken along the line XLIc-XLIc in FIG. 41(b).

Note that FIGS. 41(a) to 41(c) illustrate a state in which the central floating unit 400 is placed in a lowered position and the left-right rotation unit 500 is placed in an extended position. In addition, in FIGS. 41(a) to 41(c), illustrations of the base bodies 410, 511, 512, cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Only the main components necessary for explanation are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, when the left-right rotation unit 500 is placed in the extended position while the central floating unit 400 is placed in the lowered position, the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be able to come into contact with a pair of cylindrical portions 441b erected on the back surface of the base body 441). Thereby, movement of the first member 430 can be restricted.

For example, when the central floating unit 400 that has been placed in the raised position is placed in the lowered position by the downward rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430, the left and right rotating unit 500 is simultaneously placed in the extended position, and the first By bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), as in the case described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the first member 440 reciprocates ( horizontal shaking) can be prevented.

Alternatively, when displacing (rotating) the arm member 444 of the first member 440, by bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), the reaction of the displacement of the arm member 444 causes the first It is possible to restrict the members (base body 441 and front body 442) from reciprocating (swinging) left and right, thereby displacing only the arm members 444 while maintaining the front body 442 in a stopped state. can be visually recognized by the player.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, depending on the arrangement position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 441b), the arm A mode in which the first member 540 (base body 441 and front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the member 444, and a mode in which the first member 540 (base body 441 and front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. , a mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

Next, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, the relationship between the left and right sensor devices 600 and the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

42(a) and 43(a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42(b) and 43(b) are the lines XLIIb-XLIIb in FIG. FIG. 6 is a sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLIIIb-XLIIIb in a). FIG. 42 shows the first member 440 in the raised position, and FIG. 43 shows the first member 440 in the lowered position.

In addition, in FIGS. 42 and 43, in order to simplify the drawings and make it easier to understand, only the back case 210, the first member 440, and the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are illustrated, and illustrations of other components are omitted. be done. In addition, in FIGS. 42 and 43, the paths of the light irradiated from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, respectively, and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated onto the plate glass 16a are schematically shown using dashed double-dashed lines. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45, which will be described later, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left and right sensor device 600 detects the player's fingers in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16, and acquires the presence or absence (existence) and position of the player's fingers, as well as the direction and speed of movement. This sensor includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides with the opening 211a of the back case 210 interposed therebetween. Note that the first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall part 211 of the back case 210. will be established.

The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as optical sensors including a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated onto the glass plate 16a are in the width direction of the glass plate 16a (see FIG. 42(a)). The light-emitting parts are arranged in an inclined position with the light-emitting parts facing inward so that they overlap in the center (left-right direction). Therefore, as described above, each of the sensor devices 610 and 620 is placed at a position deeper in the width direction (a position on the outside in the width direction) than the inner edge of the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be placed in such a way that it is difficult for players to see it.

In this case, the front side of the plate glass 16a (the front side in FIG. 42(a), the bottom side in FIG. 42(b)), and the diagonally front side of the irradiation areas S1 and S2 (the front side in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting unit) ), the light emitted from the light emitting section and transmitted through the plate glass 16a is reflected by the player's fingers, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving section. The presence of the person's fingers is detected.

The left and right sensor device 600 has a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides, and can perform detection at two locations in front of the glass plate 16a (areas corresponding to each of the irradiation areas S1 and S2). Therefore, based on the detection results of both sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's fingers (which side of the irradiation area S1 or S2 is located in front of) and the direction of movement (from the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2) are determined. (direction toward or the opposite direction) or operating speed (speed when crossing between irradiation areas S1 and S2).

Here, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the light path of the left and right sensor devices 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) is set to overlap the movement area of the first member 440. be done. That is, the first member 440 is formed to be movable to a position overlapping at least a portion of the detection area of the left and right sensor devices (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the plate glass 16a).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b), the first member 440 is located in front of the glass plate 16a (front side in FIG. 43(a), bottom side in FIG. 43(b)). , an area diagonally in front of the irradiation area S1 (in front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting part of the first sensor 610) (hereinafter referred to as the "detection area of the first sensor 610"), and an area in front of the plate glass 16a. and is displaced to a position dividing the area (hereinafter referred to as "detection area of the second sensor 620") in the diagonal front of the irradiation area S2 (in front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting part of the second sensor 620). It is considered possible.

Thereby, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated in front of the glass plate 16a. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the second sensor 620 from detecting the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610, and the first sensor 610 from detecting the player's finger in the detection area of the second sensor 620. can.

Therefore, for example, an effect that allows the player to make a choice between two options (for example, two positions on the left and right in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (a position corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and a position corresponding to the detection area of the second sensor 620) A selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed at two positions corresponding to the detection area of When performing an effect in which the player selects one of the two, the accuracy of detecting the player's selection action can be improved.

Further, as described above, in the central floating unit 400, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the arm member 444 is movable relative to the first member 440 (base body 441). Since the first member 440 is disposed in a vertical direction, it is possible not only to move the first member 440 up and down linearly in the vertical direction, but also to reciprocate (swing) the first member 440 left and right (see FIG. 39). Furthermore, the stopping position of the first member 440 can be biased to either the left or right direction (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

Thereby, depending on the movement (position) of the first member 440, the size of at least one or both of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be changed. Therefore, for example, in response to a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is made to move his or her finger to search for a position (detection area) where the finger or finger is detected. It is possible to perform such a performance.

Furthermore, for example, the first member 440 can block one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 to make detection impossible. Despite the display instructing the player to select the selection target with his or her fingers, the first member 440 blocks one of the detection areas and obstructs the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, by shielding one of the detection areas with the first member 440, it is possible to display an instruction on the third symbol display device 81 urging the player to select the other detection area.

44(a) is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44(b) is a sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44(a).

As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed from a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are disposed inside, and the plurality of light emitting means are used to emit light (light up or By blinking), the light that has passed through the front surface and outer circumferential surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated outward from the front surface and outer circumferential surface. Thereby, the entire front body 442 (the front surface and the outer peripheral surface) can be visually recognized by the player as if it were emitting light.

In this case, when the light radiated outward from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (in particular, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the light is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Misdetection may occur due to interference between the light emitted from the light emitting section and the light emitted from the light emitting section, or because the light receiving section directly receives the incident light.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light irradiated to the outside from the front body 442 (particularly the outer peripheral surface) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. The displacement member 530 can be moved to a position where it can be shielded (a position that crosses the imaginary line (broken line arrow in FIG. 44(b)) connecting the front body 442 and each sensor 610, 620, hereinafter referred to as the "shielding position"). is formed. Therefore, when causing the light emitting means of the front body 442 to emit light, each sensor 610, 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 from the light emitted from the light emitting means by displacing the displacement member 530 to the shielding position. As a result, erroneous detection by each sensor 610, 620 can be suppressed.

Moreover, by making the displacement member 530 also serve as a means for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the permanent shielding member can be replaced. Since it is not necessary to provide this, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, so that more space can be secured compared to the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

Furthermore, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed to be able to move up and down between a raised position and a lowered position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and depending on the displacement position of the first member 440, The displacement member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed in the shielding position. That is, the displacement member 530 can be made to follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevated position) of the first member 440.

That is, if a permanently installed shielding member is provided to accommodate the entire range of movement of the first member 440, a large space is required to arrange the shielding member, but if the displacement member 530 is used, Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position in accordance with the displacement (elevating position) of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 can be downsized. Therefore, since a permanently installed shielding member is not required, not only can parts cost be reduced and space can be secured, but also the burden on the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the relationship between the left and right sensor device 600 and the left and right rotation unit 500 will be described.

45(a) is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45(b) is a sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45(a).

As shown in FIG. 45, the left and right rotation unit 500 is configured such that left and right displacement members 530 can be displaced (rotated) between a retracted position (see FIG. 7) and an extended position (see FIG. 8). A sensor (not shown) is provided for detecting that the left and right displacement members 530 are placed at the retracted position and the extended position. They are formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 at an intermediate position (predetermined position).

The left and right sensor device 600 is configured such that each of the sensors 610 and 620 can independently detect that each displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 is placed at an intermediate position (predetermined position). As a result, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided with means for detecting the presence or absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the glass plate 16a and means for detecting the placement of the displacement member 530 in the intermediate position. Can be used for both purposes. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is placed at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Note that the position where each displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 is detected by each sensor 610, 620 of the left-right sensor device 600 may be an extended position instead of an intermediate position. It is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is placed in the extended position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method for detecting dirt D on the glass plate 16a using the left and right sensor devices 600 will be described.

46(a) and 46(b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16, and correspond to FIG. 42(b). In addition, in FIG. 46, the path of light emitted from the light emitting part of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. In addition, in FIG. 42(a), the object F existing in the detection area of the first sensor 610 is detected, and in FIG. 42(b), the dirt D attached to the irradiation area S1 (see FIG. 42(a)) is Illustrated schematically.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), for example, when the object F (player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), the light emitting part of the first sensor 610 The light passes through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, is reflected by the object F, and is received by the light receiving section of the first sensor 610 by following the same path as the outward path. As a result, the first sensor 610 detects the presence of the player's fingers.

In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined position with their light emitting parts and light receiving parts facing inward (see FIG. 42), so that the game board 13 is These sensors 610 and 620 can be placed at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edges of the openings (see FIG. 6), and these sensors 610 and 620 can be visually recognized by the player. You can make it difficult to be attacked.

However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the angle of incidence of the light emitted from the light emitting part of the first sensor 610 on the glass plate 16a increases (the direction of incidence and the glass plate 16a become close to parallel). ) Therefore, if dirt D (for example, oil from a player's hands) is attached to the plate glass 16a, the light will be reflected in a direction different from the forward path due to the dirt D, and the reflected light will be transmitted to the first sensor 610. The light-receiving section of the camera cannot receive light. Therefore, the first sensor 610 cannot detect whether the dirt D is attached to the glass plate 16a.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined position with their light emitting parts and light receiving parts facing inward, so that the irradiation area S1 of the plate glass 16a is contaminated. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting part of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving part of the second sensor 620, thereby preventing the dirt D from being applied to the irradiation area S1 on the plate glass 16a. The presence or absence of adhesion can be detected. Note that the presence or absence of dirt D on the irradiation area S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light receiving section of the first sensor 610 detects the light emitted from the light emitting section of the second sensor 620.

That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting part of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving part of the second sensor 620, there is dirt D attached to the irradiation area S1, and the light is not received by the light receiving part of the second sensor 620. If not, it can be determined that there is no dirt D attached to the irradiation area S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting part of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving part of the first sensor 610, there is dirt D attached to the irradiation area S2. If no light is received, it can be determined that there is no dirt D attached to the irradiation area S2.

Here, it is preferable that the detection of the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is performed in the process when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since no player has entered the parlor, the object F (the player's fingers) does not exist in front of the plate glass 16a (the detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, a threshold value is set for the time required from light emission to reception based on the difference between the target object F and the dirt D (for example, the difference between the path length when reflected by the target object and the path length when reflected by the dirt D). This is because there is no need to perform the above steps (provided), and the accuracy of detecting the presence or absence of dirt D on the glass plate 16a can be increased accordingly.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47(a) is a side view of the container 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47(b) is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLVIIb in FIG. 47(a). Note that FIG. 47(a) corresponds to FIG. 18(a). Moreover, FIGS. 47(a) and 47(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

In the first embodiment, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, the rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b by the transmission mechanism. The mechanism is formed such that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted intermittently to the second rotating body 340b. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 47(d), the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment is sequentially meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351. A gear train consisting of a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355 is provided.

The first gear 2353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the number of teeth, and the other configurations are the same. Note that the number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 differs from the second gear 355 of the first embodiment only in thickness, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and rotates the two gears (the first intermediate gear 2354a and the second intermediate gear 2354b) in the axial direction (FIG. 47). (b) They are formed as an integrated member by concentrically overlapping them in the left-right direction).

Teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 2353 are formed over the entire circumference of the first side intermediate gear 2354a. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 2354 (first intermediate gear 2354a and second intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. Ru. Note that the number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is set to 21.

The second intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as the first intermediate gear 2354a except that some of the teeth of the first intermediate gear 2354a are omitted. Specifically, the second side intermediate gear 2354b has a non-meshing region where seven teeth are omitted (removed) and a region where the remaining non-meshing region (i.e., 14 teeth are peripherally disposed). A continuous area in the direction) is formed.

In the non-meshing region of the second-side intermediate gear 2354b, teeth are omitted (removed) and cannot mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355, so transmission of rotation from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355 is prevented. Be cut off. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, it can mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355, and rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

In this case, the non-meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is an area formed by omitting seven teeth from the first side intermediate gear 2354a whose number of teeth is set to 21. The central angle is 120 degrees, and since the interlocking area corresponds to the remaining 14 teeth, the central angle is 240 degrees.

Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in a section corresponding to a non-meshing region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are out of mesh, and the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second side intermediate gear 2355 are not meshed. It is rotated in a section corresponding to the starting region where it is engaged with the second gear 2355. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated by 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

Next, the rotational operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 48 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 49 and 50 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. (a) to FIG. 49(e) are shown in FIG. 50(a) to 50(d) are in the states shown as No. 1 to 5 in FIG. They correspond to the states shown as 6 to 9, respectively.

In addition, in FIGS. 48 to 50, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by “A to C”, and the second rotation The first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C of the body 340a are illustrated using symbols "A' to C'," respectively.

Here, a state in which the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the visible position (the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49(a) ) is hereinafter referred to as the "initial state". In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set to the boundary position on one side between the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the starting end of the non-meshing region). (See FIG. 47(a)).

No. 48 in FIG. As shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49(a), from the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the visible position (No. 1 in FIG. 48). 1 "A', A", first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and its second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b Rotation is not transmitted due to the action of the non-meshing region in the second side intermediate gear 2354b), and the stopped state is maintained.

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49(b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is placed at the visible position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "A', B" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

Note that No. 48 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49(b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49(a)), and accordingly, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 120 degrees. The phase of the intermediate gear 2354 relative to the second gear 2355 is located at the boundary position on the other side between the meshing region and the non-meshing region (starting end of the meshing region, end of the non-meshing region). be done.

No. 48 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees due to the action of the meshing area (the first 120 degree area of the 240 degree central angle).

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49(c), the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at a visible position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 3 "B', C" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

No. 48 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49(c), when the first rotary body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and its third display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, the second rotary body 340b is The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees due to the action of the meshing area (the latter 120 degree area of the 240 degree central angle).

As a result, No. 48 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49(d), the second rotating body 340b places the third display plate 343C at a visible position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 "C', A" in FIG. 48) can be formed.

Note that No. 48 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49(d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49(a)), and accordingly, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees. Since the intermediate gear 2354 is rotated by a degree, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is located at the boundary position on one side between the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the starting end of the non-meshing region). be done.

Thereafter, the process is substantially the same as that described above (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49(a) to the state shown in No. 3 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49(c)). The aspect is repeated two more times to complete a cycle (the table is cycled from start to end).

In this case, No. 48 in FIG. 4~No. In the section of the state shown in No. 6, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49(a) to 49(c) may be changed by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No. .5 "C', B") and a sixth combination (No. 6 "A', C" in FIG. 48).

Also, No. 48 in FIG. 7~No. In the section of the state shown in No. 9, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49(a) to 49(c) may be changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. .7 "B', A"), forming the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in Figure 48) and the ninth combination (No. 9 "C', C" in Figure 48) be able to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train consisting of a plurality of gears. The first gear (intermediate gear 2354) has a meshing region that meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) and transmits rotation, and a meshing region that does not mesh with the mating gear and blocks transmission of rotation. A non-dental region is formed.

Thereby, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so the combination of the shapes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations, which are the maximum number of possible combinations, can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform effective effects by rotating the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing component costs.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, there are two states: a state where the second rotating body 340b is stopped while the first rotating body 340a is rotated, and a state where both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. state can be formed. That is, it is possible to stop the rotation of the second rotating body 340b while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and to release the stoppage of the second rotating body 340b and restart the rotation. It is possible to increase the interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of figures on the second rotating body 340b.

Moreover, according to the transmission mechanism of this embodiment, since it does not have directionality in the rotation direction, the direction of movement of the table shown in FIG. 48 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse directions. Therefore, for example, from the state where the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 48) is formed, the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) is created. In addition to advancing the table in FIG. 48 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 48) to reveal the eighth combination, the table in FIG. 48 is advanced in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 48). It is also possible to make a ninth combination appear.

As a result, as in the former case, No. From 7 to No. In the transition to No. 8, only the first rotating body 340a is rotated while the second rotating body 340b is stopped, to reveal the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48). (i.e., with "B'" already appearing on one side, switch from "A" to "B" on the other side to make "B', B" appear), and the latter. As in the case, No. 48 in FIG. From 9 to No. In the transition to No. 8, both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated to reveal the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48). (and the other two figures are switched to make "B', B" appear) can be arbitrarily selected and executed according to the game state.

In addition, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a seven times, whereas in the latter case, the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a needs to be repeated twice. Since all you have to do is to do this, you can quickly create a desired combination of figures.

Here, in this embodiment, a non-meshing region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second-side intermediate gear 2354b), and while the first rotating body 340a is being rotated, the second rotating body 340b is rotated and stopped. is switched, and the combination of shapes is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each include a first display plate 343A to a third display plate 343C, and the figures drawn on each outer circumferential surface are arranged at 120 degree intervals, non-meshing occurs. The area formation range (center angle) is set to 120 degrees.

As a result, the phases of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b do not shift, so that the table shown in FIG. The length can be shortened (the number of table stages can be reduced). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b required to make a desired combination of figures appear. That is, the time required to create a desired combination of figures can be shortened.

However, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set so as not to correspond to the intervals between the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, if the formation range of the non-meshing region is set to a central angle of 108 degrees, a phase shift between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will occur, as in the first embodiment. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of combinations of figures (for example, 9 sets), and also to form a state in which the figures are not combined, allowing the player to visually recognize the deviation of the figures (the combination does not hold).

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. FIG. 51(a) is a side view of the container 330 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 51(b) is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIb in FIG. 51(a). Note that FIG. 51(a) corresponds to FIG. 18(a). Further, FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the intermediate gear 2354 has one non-meshing region and one meshing region, but the intermediate gear 3354 in the third embodiment has one non-meshing region and one meshing region. Two matching areas are formed in each area. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(d), the transmission mechanism in the third embodiment is sequentially meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351. The gear train includes a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

The first gear 3353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in thickness, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 has a different number of teeth and a different thickness from the second gear 355 of the first embodiment, but the other configurations are the same. Note that the number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and rotates the two gears (the first intermediate gear 3354a and the second intermediate gear 3354b) in the axial direction (Fig. 51 (b) They are formed as an integrated member by concentrically overlapping them in the left-right direction).

Teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 3353 are formed over the entire circumference of the first side intermediate gear 3354a. Therefore, while the first gear 3353 (first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 3354 (first side intermediate gear 3354a and second side intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. Ru. Note that the number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is set to 35.

The second intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as the first intermediate gear 3354a except that some of the teeth of the first intermediate gear 3354a are omitted. Specifically, the second side intermediate gear 3354b includes a first non-meshing region X1 and a second non-meshing region X2, which are regions where seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth. A first meshing region Y1, which is a region located on one side between the mating region X1 and a second non-mating region X2, and where seven teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction, and from the first meshing region Y1. A second meshing region Y2 is located on the other side between the first meshing region X1 and the second non-mating region X2 with a phase difference of 180 degrees, and is a region in which 14 teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction. is formed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated by 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-meshing area X1 and the second non-meshing area X2, while the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353 ) can be rotated by 120 degrees.

Next, the rotational operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 52 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, and FIG. (a) to FIG. 53(d) are shown in FIG. 54(a) and 54(b), the states shown as No. 1 to 4 in FIG. This corresponds to the states shown as 5 and 6, respectively.

In addition, in FIGS. 52 to 54, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by “A to C”, and the second rotation The first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C of the body 340a are illustrated using symbols "A' to C'," respectively.

Here, in the initial state in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are placed in the visible position. It is assumed that it has been placed. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is set at the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first (the starting end of the non-meshing region X1) (see FIG. 51(a)).

No. 52 in FIG. 1 and FIG. 53(a), from the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the visible position (No. 1 in FIG. 52). 1 "A', A", first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and its second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, the second rotating body 340b Due to the action of the first non-meshing region X1 in the second intermediate gear 3354b), rotation is not transmitted and the stopped state is maintained.

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53(b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is placed at the visible position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "A', B" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

Note that No. 52 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53(b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53(a)), and accordingly, the rotation relative to the second gear 3355 is The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-meshing region X1 and the second meshing region Y2 (the starting end of the second non-meshing region Y2, the terminal end of the first non-meshing region X1). Placed.

No. 52 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated by 120 degrees due to the action of the second meshing region Y2 (the first seven teeth of the fourteen teeth).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 53(c), the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at a visible position. As a result, the third combination (No. 3 "B', C" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

No. 52 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 53(c), when the first rotary body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and its third display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, the second rotary body 340b is The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated by 120 degrees due to the action of the second meshing region Y2 (the latter 7 teeth of the 14 teeth).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53(d), the second rotating body 340b places the third display plate 343C at a visible position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 "C', A" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

Note that No. 52 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53(d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53(a)), and as a result, the rotation relative to the second gear 3355 is The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-meshing region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the starting end of the second non-meshing region) be done.

No. 52 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. Rotation is not transmitted due to the action of the second non-meshing region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b), and the stopped state is maintained.

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54(a), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the third display plate 343C is located at the visible position. Thereby, the fifth combination (No. 5 "C', B" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

Note that No. 52 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54(a), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 480 degrees (120 degrees×4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53(a)), and accordingly, , the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is at the boundary position between the second non-meshing region X2 and the first meshing region Y1 (the end of the second non-meshing region X, the first meshing region (starting end of area Y1).

No. 52 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and its third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position from the state shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. It is rotated by 120 degrees due to the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

As a result, No. 52 in FIG. 6 and FIG. 54(b), the second rotating body 340b places the first display plate 343A at a visible position. Thereby, the sixth combination (No. 6 "A', C" in FIG. 52) can be formed.

Note that No. 52 in FIG. 6 and FIG. 54(b), the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53(a)). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase relative to the second gear 3355 is adjusted to the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the first meshing region Y1). 53(a)).

Therefore, from now on, the above-mentioned aspect (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 53(a) to the state shown in No. 6 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 54(b)) and substantially The same aspect is repeated. As a result, nine combinations can be formed during one cycle (one round from the start point to the end point of the table). In this embodiment, the number of stages of the table in one cycle is 15.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train consisting of a plurality of gears. The first gear (intermediate gear 3354) has meshing regions (first and second meshing regions Y1, Y2) that mesh with the mating gear (second gear 3355) to transmit rotation, and Non-meshing regions (first and second non-meshing regions Y1, Y2) are formed that are non-meshing with the gear and interrupt transmission of rotation.

Thereby, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so the combination of the shapes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations, which are the maximum number of possible combinations, can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform effective effects by rotating the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing component costs.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-meshing regions (first and second non-meshing regions X1, X2) that block transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. They are arranged in a dispersed manner, and engaged regions and non-engaged regions are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, No. 52 in FIG. 4 to no. As in the state shown in 7, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be stopped continuously in two types of shapes. Therefore, the anticipation and interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be increased.

Further, according to the transmission mechanism of this embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the direction of movement of the table shown in FIG. 52 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse directions. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 4 to no. By switching the direction of movement between forward and reverse directions up to 7, the player can visually recognize the rotational speeds of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different speeds.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55(a) is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55(b) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVb in FIG. 55(a). Further, FIG. 55(c) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55(a). Note that in FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand, illustrations of the base body 410, cover body 420, etc. are omitted, and only the main components necessary for explanation are illustrated.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430, but the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment are 4449 are formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. Incidentally, the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(c), a central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has sliding grooves 4439 formed at the distal ends of each of a pair of arm bodies 4430, and A pair of connecting pins 4449 are inserted into each sliding groove 4439 and protrude from the back surface of the first member 4440.

The sliding groove 4439 is formed as a linearly extending opening in the shape of an elongated hole when viewed from the front, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body with a circular cross section that can slide along the sliding groove 441a. The arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected so as to be relatively movable via the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449. Note that a collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 to prevent it from coming off.

As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 in this embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. In this structure, the connecting pin 4449 is protruded from the first member 4440, and the sliding groove 4439 is formed in the pair of arm bodies 4430, so that by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm body 4430, The direction (angle of inclination) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is caused to reciprocate (swing) left and right due to inertia (action of inertia) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), when the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated) ) When the first member 4440 is reciprocated (swinging) left and right due to the reaction force generated by the movement (see FIGS. 39 and 40), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the manner in which the first member 4440 reciprocates can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially V-shape, a rotational component can be applied as described above, so that the first member 440 is Not only linear motion, but also a combination of linear motion and rotational motion, allowing for reciprocating (swinging) from side to side.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (opposing angle of the letter V) is adjusted. As a result, the manner in which the first member 4440 reciprocates from side to side can be changed.

For example, by reducing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (reducing the opposing angle of the V-shape), the rotational component is increased, and the rotational component of the first member 4440 is The rate of rotational movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the opposing angle of the V-shape), the rotational component is reduced, and the rotational component of the first member 4440 is The rate of linear motion can be increased.

In particular, according to this embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line as shown in FIG. The reciprocating motion (swinging) can be performed using only linear motion. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the first member 4440 moves horizontally in the left-right direction.

In this way, by changing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocating the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed (a mode including a rotational component and a mode including a rotational component). (1) is impossible to achieve in the first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base body 441); This became possible for the first time by forming a sliding groove 4439 at the tip. Thereby, the movement of the first member 4440 can be varied.

Next, the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56(a) and 57(a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56(b) and 57(b) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 5500. and a cross-sectional rear view of the left-right rotation unit 5500.

Note that FIG. 56(b) and FIG. 57(b) correspond to FIG. 41(c). In addition, in FIGS. 56 and 57, illustrations of the base bodies 410, 511, 512, cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Only the configuration is illustrated.

In the left-right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, the extended position is located lower than in the left-right rotation unit 500 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 41). Therefore, when the left-right rotation unit 5500 is placed in the extended position while the central floating unit 400 is placed in the lowered position, the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 5500 moves the first member 440 ( A pair of cylindrical portions 441b erected on the back surface of the base body 441) can be pushed down.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, with the central floating unit 400 placed in the lowered position, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are alternately placed in the extended position (one is placed in the extended position). By repeating the operation of placing the first member 440 in the extended position and slightly retracting the other member from the extended position, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (swinging) left and right.

In this case, the left and right displacement members 530 are alternately arranged in the extended position and retreated from the extended position, and the first member 440 is reciprocated (swinging) to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so that they are interlocked (synchronized). The first member 440 and the left and right displacement members 530 can all work together to form a movement that swings vertically and horizontally, allowing the player to perceive a large movement with a sense of unity.

Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 is caused to collide with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), and the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision causes the first member 440 to reciprocate (swing) left and right, and to move in a predetermined manner. After a period of time has elapsed, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then collide with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), and the first member 440 may continue to reciprocate (swing) left and right. The reciprocating motion of the first member 440 to the left and right can be emphasized to make the player aware of it.

In this way, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is moved relative to the arm body 430 due to inertia (action of inertia force) when the upward or downward rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped. In addition to the configuration in which the first member 440 is reciprocated from side to side, the first member 440 is reciprocated from side to side using the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 without using the inertia force caused by the displacement of the arm body 430. can also be formed.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the end plate 342 of the second rotating body 340b is fixed to the second gear 355 has been described, but the second rotating body 6340b in the sixth embodiment is fixed to the end plate 6342. Gear 6355 is allowed to rotate relative to each other. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the second rotating body 6340b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 58, the second rotating body 6340b includes a fixed shaft 6341, a pair of end plates 6342 that are rotatably supported by shaft portions 6341a at both axial ends of the fixed shaft 6341, and It mainly includes three display boards (a first display board 343A, a second display board 343B, and a third display board 343C) installed between the face plates 6342.

The fixed shaft 6341 is a part that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332, 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 6330, and connects a pair of shaft parts 6341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft parts 6341a. A body portion 6341b is provided.

The shaft portion 6341a is made of a hard resin material, extends beyond the longitudinal dimension of the shaft support 6342b, and has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis that is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 6342a of the end plate 6342. At the same time, it is held non-rotatably in the holding holes 332a, 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332, 333. Note that in order to ensure strength, the shaft portion 6341a may be formed from a metal material.

Here, the shaft portion 6341a has a smaller diameter than the holding holes 332a, 333a (see FIG. 17), but a circular fixing member (the outer circumferential shape is A member whose inner circumference is slightly smaller than the inner circumference of the holes 332a and 333a and whose inner circumference is slightly larger than the shaft portion 6341a (not shown) is interposed, and the holding holes 332a and 333a and the shaft portion 6341a are The shaft portions 6341a are fixed to the holding holes 332a, 333a by fixing the circular fixing members with an adhesive or the like. Note that the fixing means is not limited to adhesive, and various methods can be used. For example, it may be fixed with a fastening screw.

The length of the body portion 6341b in the axial direction (the length in the left-right direction in FIG. 58) is shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, and the difference in length The connecting portion 6342c of the end plate 6342 can be disposed in such a way that it protrudes from the portion where the connecting portion 6342c is located.

The end plate 6342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a cylindrical shaft support 6342b extending in the axial direction in the central portion, and a shaft support hole 6342a provided at the center of the shaft support 6342b. and a three-pronged connecting portion 6342c that connects the end surface of the shaft support 6342b to the end surface of the end plate 6342 with an offset to the inside of the second rotating body 6340b (center side in FIG. 58). A gap 6342d is created around 6342b in the radial direction.

The shaft support 6342b includes a cylindrical shaft support body 6342b1 that extends outward from the central portion of the connecting portion 6342c, and a shaft support body 6342b1 that extends outward from the shaft support body 6342b1 and is pivotally supported at an eccentric position in the circumferential direction. It mainly includes a power switching section 6342b2 including a swingable engagement piece 6342bt.

The shaft support body 6342b1 extends to near the end of the gap 6342b.

A first state in which the engagement piece 6342bt is capable of swinging in a dogleg-shaped region in the axial cross section of the power switching section 6342b2, and a tip thereof is extended outside the outer shape of the power switching section 6342b2; It is a member that can form a second state in which the tip fits inside the outer shape of the power switching part 6342b2. Note that both the first state and the second state are states in which the engagement piece 6342bt is disposed at the end of the dogleg-shaped region of the power switching portion 6342b2, and the engagement piece 6342bt is a torsion spring or the like. The first state (FIG. 59( d)).

The center portion of the axially inner end surface of the connecting portion 6342c abuts (comes into contact with) the axially both end surfaces of the body portion 6341b. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the connecting portion 6342c from tilting with respect to the body portion 6341b, and it is possible to suppress a load from being applied to the shaft portion 6341a in the axial radial direction. Further, the connecting portion 6342c includes a sensor portion 6342c1 formed of a non-contact magnetic sensor near the outer periphery of the plate portion formed into three prongs.

The sensor portion 6342c1 has a detection surface facing outside the connecting portion 6342c (outside in the axial direction of the second rotary body 6340b), and is close to the detection portion 6355c formed in the second gear 6355, so that the second rotation The configuration is such that the phase relationship between the body 6340b and the second gear 6355 can be detected.

Note that since the sensor portion 6342c1 is disposed on the end plate 6342, there is a possibility that the wiring of the sensor portion 6342c1 may be twisted due to the rotation of the second rotating body 6340b. In contrast, in this embodiment, a brush-type contact (not shown) is provided in a protruding manner in the radial direction of the body 6341b, and surrounds the body 6341b in a manner that can slide on the brush-type contact. A metal ring-shaped slip ring (not shown) that is rotatable about 6341b is provided. By connecting the wiring of the sensor section 6342c1 to this slip ring, it is possible to suppress the wiring of the sensor section 6342c1 from being twisted while making it possible to supply power to the sensor section 6342c.

When viewed in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 6342a, the gap 6342d extends to the connecting portion 6342b, and has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis that is larger than the outer diameter of the second gear 6355. This allows the second gear 6355 to be disposed in such a manner as to protrude toward the gap 6342d.

The second gear 6355 is a gear member that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 350 (see FIG. 59) to the second rotating body 6340b, and has an inner diameter slightly larger than the shaft support body 6341b in the center along the thickness direction. A recessed portion 6355a is recessed from the side facing the end plate 6342, and a recessed portion 6355a is bored outward from the end opposite to the end plate 6342b (to the side opposite to the end plate 6342b). a detection portion 6355c disposed near the outer peripheral surface of the axially inner end of the second gear 6355 (the side facing the end plate 6342) and made of a magnetic material; , is mainly provided. With this configuration, the second gear 6355 includes an opening in which the recessed portion 6355a and the power switching hole 6355b are connected. Note that, as shown in FIG. 58, in this embodiment, the thickness of the teeth of the second gear 6355 in the axial direction is different between the left and right second gears 6355, but since the technical idea is the same, the explanation will be made without distinguishing between them.

The second gear 6355 is rotatably supported by the shaft support body 6342b1 by the recessed portion 6355a. At this time, since the recessed portion 6355a is accommodated in the region of the gap 6342d, the entire region outside the end plate 342 in the axial direction is used as a region for forming the first wall surface 6355b1 and the second wall surface 6355b2 of the power switching hole 6355b. be able to. Therefore, even when it is necessary to form the first wall surface 6355b1 and the second wall surface 6355b2 wide in the axial direction in order to reinforce the first wall surface 6355b1 and the second wall surface 6355b2, the container 6330 (see FIG. 59) can be prevented from changing its lateral dimensions.

The power switching holes 6355b are arranged at equal intervals (divided into 12 in this embodiment, that is, at intervals of 30 degrees) and are curved and extended in the radial direction. It is formed in a circular saw shape and includes a second wall surface 6355b2 extending in such a manner as to connect one radially inner end and the other radially outer end of 6355b1.

The first wall surface 6355b1 is arranged at a position where the outer end in the radial direction in the circumferential direction of the power switching hole 6355b can come into contact with the engagement piece 6342bt arranged in the first state, and the engagement piece 6342b1 When the engaging piece 6342bt is in contact with the wall surface 6355b1, the diameter of the engaging piece 6342bt is curved along the swing locus of the largest portion (see FIG. 60(e)). As a result, when the second gear 6355 rotates in a sliding direction with respect to the engagement piece 6342bt, the engagement piece 6342bt can be easily placed in the first state at a stage with a small phase difference, and the second gear 6355 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag between the start of rotation of the second gear 6355 and the start of rotation of the end face plate 6342 when the second gear 6355 is reversely rotated.

The detection portions 6355c are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the second gear 6355 (divided into 12 in this embodiment, that is, at intervals of 30 degrees), and are formed in the direction in which the engagement piece 6342bt slides with respect to the second gear 6355. When the second gear 6355 rotates (clockwise in FIG. 59(e)), the side surface of the engagement piece 6342bt comes into contact with the first wall surface 6355b1 in the phase relationship in which the sensor section 6342c1 starts to detect the detection section 6355c. (see FIG. 60(e)).

59(a) is a side view of the container 6330 in which the second rotating body 6340b is arranged as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 59(b) is a side view in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 59(a). 59(c) is a side view of the containing body 6330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIc in FIG. 59(b), and FIG. 59(e) is a partially enlarged side view of the second rotating body 6340b in FIG. 59(c). Note that FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b) show a state in which the side wall body 332, partition wall body 334, and decoration body 335 are removed, and FIG. 59(c) shows a state in which the side wall body 333 is further removed. The condition is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c), transmission paths for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 350 are formed at both ends of the rotating bodies 340a and 6340b. , 6340b (intermediate gears) are composed of different gears.

In addition, in this embodiment, the intermediate gear 354 described in the first embodiment is disposed in the first transmission path FL1 (see FIG. 59(a)) formed on the left side in front view, and the intermediate gear 354 formed on the right side in front view is disposed. In the second transmission path FL2 (see FIG. 59(c)), the intermediate gear 2354 described in the second embodiment is provided. Thereby, the rotation pattern of the rotating bodies 340a, 6340b can be changed depending on which transmission path the driving force of the drive motor 350 is transmitted to the rotating bodies 340a, 6340b.

Here, means for switching the path for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 350 to the rotating bodies 340a, 6340b will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 59(d) and 59(e), the engaging piece 6342bt arranged in the first state can contact the first wall surface 6355b1 of the power switching hole 6355b in the circumferential direction. Since the intermediate gears 354 and 2354 both rotate in conjunction with the rotation of the first rotating body 340a, the rotation directions of the intermediate gears 354 and 2354 are the same. That is, in FIGS. 59(d) and 59(e), which illustrate states of the intermediate gears 354, 2354 from opposite sides in the axial direction, the rotation directions of the intermediate gears 354, 2354 are opposite directions.

Therefore, when the intermediate gear 354 rotates clockwise in FIG. 59(d) (the drive motor 350 rotates counterclockwise when viewed in the direction of FIG. 59(a)), the intermediate gear 2354 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 59(e). Rotate clockwise. In this case, when the second gear 6355 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gear 354 (first transmission path FL1, see FIG. 59(a)), the first wall surface 6355b1 swings the engagement piece 6342bt. It contacts the engagement piece 6342bt in the circumferential direction in such a manner that it is pressed against the end of the moving range (the doglegged area). As a result, the rotation of the second gear 6355 is transmitted to the end plate 6342, and the second rotating body 6340b rotates.

On the other hand, when the second gear 6355 rotates clockwise in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gear 2354 (the drive motor 350 rotates counterclockwise as viewed in the direction of FIG. 59(a)), (the second transmission path FL2, (See FIG. 59(c)), the engagement piece 6342bt is pushed by the second wall surface 6355b2 and placed in the second state, so that the engagement piece 6342bt and the first wall surface 6355b1 and the second wall surface 6355b2 are aligned in the circumferential direction. The rotation of the second gear 6355 is not transmitted to the end plate 6342.

Similarly, when the first rotating body 340 rotates in the opposite direction (the drive motor 350 rotates clockwise as viewed from the direction of FIG. 59(d)), the intermediate gear 354 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 59(d). At the same time, when the intermediate gear 2354 rotates clockwise in FIG. , see FIG. 59(c)), the second gear 6355 meshed with the intermediate gear 354 does not transmit power to the end plate 6342 (first transmission path FL1, see FIG. 59(a)).

That is, in this embodiment, by disposing gears including one-way clutches (so-called "sprag-type" one-way clutches) at both ends of the second rotating body 6340b, the driving force of the drive motor 350 is transmitted to the pair of transmission paths. Transmission to the end plate 6342 by either one of these is achieved.

Although not described in this embodiment, it is also possible to use a "cam type (roller type)" one-way clutch that is a known technology. With a "cam type" one-way clutch, it is possible to switch between a state in which driving force is transmitted and a state in which it is not transmitted at any timing, regardless of the phase difference between the inner and outer wheels, so that the one-way clutch slips in the direction of slipping. It is possible to suppress the time delay when rotating in the opposite direction after rotation (the time delay when the inner ring starts rotating with respect to when the outer ring starts rotating).

Therefore, the performance of the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b can be complicated without increasing the number of drive motors 350.

Here, as in this embodiment, when switching the driving force transmission in relation to the power switching section 6342b2 depending on the direction in which the second gear 6355 is rotated, when the second gear 6355 is stopped by stopping the drive motor 350, There is a problem in that the power switching section 6342b2 attempts to continue rotating due to rotational inertia, which may cause a load to be applied to the second gear 6355.

For example, in this embodiment, the drive motor 350 is stopped when the driving force is being transmitted through the first transmission path FL1 shown in FIG. 59(a) (the second gear 6355 rotates counterclockwise). Then, the power switching section 6342b tries to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 59(a) due to rotational inertia. In this case, on the side of FIG. 59(c), since the power switching section 6342b rotates clockwise, rotation is transmitted from the power switching section 6342b to the second gear 6355 (at this time, the first rotating body 340a is stopped and (because the intermediate gear 2354 is also stopped), there is a risk that a load will be applied to the second gear 6355.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid 6330a is arranged along the axial direction of the second rotating body 6340b. The electromagnetic solenoid 6330a is formed in such a manner that it protrudes when the drive motor 350 stops (output is OFF), so when the drive motor 350 stops, the electromagnetic solenoid 6330a brakes the second rotating body 6340b. This prevents the power switching unit 6342b from rotating due to inertia when the drive motor 350 is stopped, and suppresses the load on the second gear 6355.

In this embodiment, the drive motor 350 is disposed on the first transmission path FL1 (see FIG. 59(a)), and the driving force is transmitted to the second transmission path FL2 (see FIG. 59(c)). , a first rotating body 340a is interposed. In other words, the first rotating body 340a serves both as a presentation member and as a transmission member that transmits the driving force, so when the transmission member is disposed outside the rotation locus of the first rotating body 340a. The space inside the container 6330 can be used more effectively than in the case of FIG.

Here, as a mode of transmitting the driving force to a pair of transmission paths arranged on the left and right, for example, a drive motor with two shafts (a drive motor with rotating shafts arranged on both the left and right directions in FIG. 59(b)) It is also conceivable to arrange the drive motor 350 at the position of the drive motor 350. However, in this case, since the rotation shaft of the drive motor is disposed in the space to the right of the drive motor 350 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 59(b)), other performance members (for example, movable members or It becomes impossible to install lighting devices such as LEDs. In addition, if it is necessary to arrange other performance members in the space to the right of the drive motor 350 due to performance or mechanical reasons, the rotating shaft may be arranged in the space to the right of the drive motor 350. I can't.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the area within the rotation locus of the first rotating body 340a that is minimally necessary for the performance of the first rotating body 340a is utilized as the second transmission path FL2, the right side of the drive motor 350 The space on the other side can be effectively used as a space for arranging other presentation members (for example, movable members and lighting devices such as LEDs).

In this embodiment, the first transmission path FL1 and the second transmission path FL2 are configured at the left and right ends of the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the width required for the left and right outer sides of the pair of rotating bodies 340a, 6340b, and improve the degree of freedom in design. Since it serves a dual purpose, it is possible to reduce the number of required members.

An example of control of the drive motor 350 (see FIG. 59(b)) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60(a) is a timing chart showing the output voltage of the sensor portion 6342c1 when the second gear 6355 rotates in the sliding direction with respect to the engagement piece 6342bt, and FIGS. 60(b) to 60(d) 60(e) is a timing chart showing an example of the operating state of the drive motor 350 in the state shown in FIG. 60(a), and FIG. FIG. 60(f) is a front view of the second gear 355 and end plate 6342 when the drive motor 350 is stopped at timing t3 shown in FIG. 60(c). FIG. 60(g) is a front view of the second gear 355 and the end plate 6342 when the drive motor 350 is stopped at timing t1 shown in FIG. 60(d).

Here, for example, when the driving force of the drive motor 350 is transmitted through the first transmission path FL1 (see FIG. 59(b)) (when the drive motor 350 rotates clockwise as viewed from the direction of FIG. 59(a) ), the second gear 6355 on the left (see FIG. 59(a)) rotates in a sliding direction with respect to the engagement piece 6342bt of the end plate 6342, so the second gear 6355 on the left and the end plate 6342 are idle. It becomes possible.

At this time, if the second gear 6355 on the right side (see FIG. 59(c)) and the intermediate gear 2354 (see FIG. 59(c)) are in mesh with each other, the driving force on the left side is transmitted through the transmission path FL2. The rotation of the end plate 6342 (see FIG. 59(a)) and the rotation of the second gear due to the driving force transmission through the transmission path FL1 occur, and these rotate at the same speed (see FIG. 59 above the first rotating body 340a). (the gear ratios are the same), the phase relationship between the left end plate 6342 and the left second gear 6355 does not change.

On the other hand, when the second gear on the right side (see FIG. 59(c)) and the intermediate gear 2354 (see FIG. 59(c)) slide, the second rotating body is 6340b stops rotating. Therefore, a phase difference occurs between the left second gear 6355 (see FIG. 59(a)) that rotates due to the transmission through the transmission path FL1 and the engagement piece 6342bt disposed on the second rotating body 6340b that stops. (The second gear 6355 idles relative to the end plate 6342).

In FIG. 60(a), the horizontal axis represents the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the end plate 6342 based on a predetermined posture, and as described above, the second gear 6355 idles relative to the end plate 6342. The output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c is illustrated in the figure. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the detection unit 6355c approaches the sensor unit 6342c1 at the timing when the output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c rises from the voltage V0 to the voltage V1 (the detection unit 6355c enters the detection area of the sensor unit 6342c1). (begins to enter). Furthermore, at the timing when the output voltage from the sensor section 6342c decreases from the voltage V1 to the voltage V0, the detection section 6355c moves away from the sensor section 6342c1 (the detection section 6355c starts to come out from the detection area of the sensor section 6342c1). In this embodiment, since the detection parts 6355c are arranged at intervals of 30 degrees in the circumferential direction of the second gear 6355, the interval between each rising portion of the voltage is such that the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the end plate 6342 is 30 degrees. equal to the time interval that occurs once.

Here, as described above, when the second gear 6355 rotates in the direction in which the engagement piece 6342bt slides with respect to the second gear 6355 (clockwise in FIG. 59(e)), the sensor section 6355c In the phase relationship in which the detection portion 6342c1 starts to detect the detection portion 6355c, the engagement piece 6342bt is arranged in such a manner that the side surface thereof is in contact with the first wall surface 6355b1 (see FIG. 60(e)).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(b), when the rotation of the drive motor 350 is stopped at timing t2 when the output voltage from the sensor section 6342c1 rises, the engagement piece 6342b is attached to the first wall surface 6355b1 of the second gear 6355 on the left. The second gear 6355 stops at the phase in which the side surfaces of (see FIG. 60(e)) come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 59(a)) from this state, the rotation of the left second gear 6355 (see FIG. 59(d)) is caused by the rotation of the drive motor 350. The second rotating body 6340b rotates without delay.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the rotation of the drive motor is stopped at timing t3 when the output voltage from the sensor section 6342c1 decreases, the left second gear 6355 (see FIG. 59(d)) rotates slightly clockwise (5 to 15 degrees) and stops with the engagement piece 6342bt separated from the first wall surface 6355b1 (see FIG. 60(f)).

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 60(d), when the rotation of the drive motor is stopped at timing t1 between the timing at which the output voltage from the sensor section 6342c1 falls and the timing at which the output voltage rises, the second gear 6355 ( 59(d)) rotates further clockwise than the state shown in FIG. 60(f), and the engagement piece 6342bt stops in a state further away from the first wall surface 6355b1 (see FIG. 60(g)). .

As shown in FIGS. 60(f) and 60(g), when the second gear 6355 stops in a state where the engagement piece 6342bt is separated from the first wall surface 6355b1, from this state, the drive motor 350 (FIG. 59( a) in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 59(a)), the engagement piece 6342bt comes into contact with the first wall surface 6355b1, and the engagement piece 6342bt comes into contact with the end face of the power switching section 6342b2. No driving force is transmitted from the second gear 6355 to the end plate 6342 until the second gear 6355 makes contact with the end plate 6342. Therefore, the timing at which the intermediate gear 2354 and the second gear 6355 start to mesh with each other and the timing at which the second rotating body 6340b starts may deviate (wobble will occur in the rotation of the second rotating body 6352b), which may reduce the performance effect. was there.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 350 is controlled to stop at timing t2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the intermediate gear 2354 and the second gear 6355 start meshing and the timing at which the second rotating body 6340b starts to deviate from each other. Note that in consideration of the transient response during deceleration of the drive motor 350, it is preferable to perform control in such a manner that the drive motor 350 is stopped slightly earlier than timing t2.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotational force is transmitted to the pair of rotating bodies 340a, 6340b by the pair of transmission paths FL1, FL2, but in the seventh embodiment, the pair of rotating bodies 7340a, 7340b are driven Depending on the rotational direction of the motor 350, it is possible to switch whether the rotating bodies 7340a, 7340b rotate or the fixed shaft 7341 rotates. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61 is an exploded front perspective view of a first rotating body 7340a in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, the first rotating body 7340a is rotatably supported by a fixed shaft 7341 (in this embodiment, the fixed shaft 7341 is configured to be rotatable) and both ends of the fixed shaft 7341 in the axial direction. a pair of end plates 342, 7342, and three display plates (first display plate 343A, second display plate 343B, and third display plate 343C) installed between the pair of end plates 342, 7342; A second gear rotatably supported by a drive-side end plate 7342 disposed on the left side in front view (the side where the drive motor 350 is disposed, see FIG. 62) of the pair of end plates 342, 7342. 6355 and an engagement member 7345 rotatably supported by a fixed shaft 7341.

The fixed shaft 7341 includes a body portion 341b, a shaft portion 7341a connected to the right end of the body portion 341b when viewed from the front, and a columnar shape connected to the body portion 341b on the opposite side of the shaft portion 7341a. It mainly includes a drive-side shaft portion 7341c.

The shaft portion 7341a is a cylindrical member having a circular outer shape in a cross section perpendicular to the axis, and is a portion rotatably held in the container 7330 (see FIG. 62). At this time, the holding hole 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall body 333 is processed into a circular shape, so that the shaft portion 7341a is rotatably held in the housing body 7330. Note that a biasing force is applied to the shaft portion 7341a by a biasing means such as a torsion spring CS1 (see FIG. 62) fixed to the housing 7330 in a direction in which the LED 344 is maintained in a posture facing the front direction.

The drive-side shaft portion 7341c is formed into a cylindrical shape with a smaller diameter than the shaft support hole 6342a of the drive-side end plate 7342, and is cut out in a fan shape from the center of the shaft toward the outside in the radial direction in a portion extending from the shaft support hole 6342b. It mainly includes a notch 7341c1 and a pin support recess 7341c2 recessed from the end of the drive side shaft portion 7341c on the rotation axis of the fixed shaft 7341.

The notch 7341c1 is a part that partially accommodates the engagement member 7345, and is designed to have an axial width slightly longer than the thickness of the engagement member 7345, and a circumferential opening width (a fan-shaped (formation angle) is made larger than the fan-shaped formation angle of the main body portion 7345a of the engagement member 7345. That is, the engaging member 7345 is allowed to move in the circumferential direction inside the notch 7341c1.

The pin support recess 7341c2 is configured to be connected to the notch 7341c1 in the axial direction.

The drive side end plate 7342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a cylindrical shaft support 6342b extending in the axial direction in the central portion, and a shaft support provided at the center of the shaft support 6342b. It mainly includes a hole 6342a.

The shaft support 6342b includes a cylindrical shaft support body 6342b1 that extends axially outward from the plate portion, and a shaft support body 6342b1 that extends outward from the shaft support body 6342b1 and is pivotally supported at an eccentric position and swings in the circumferential direction. It mainly includes a power switching section 6342b2 provided with an engaging piece 6342bt.

The second gear 6355 is a gear member that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 350 (see FIG. 62) to the first rotating body 7340a, and has an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the shaft support body 6342b in the center along the thickness direction. A recessed portion 6355a that is recessed from the side facing the drive side end plate 7342, and an outer side from the opposite end of the drive side end plate 7342 of the recessed portion 6355a (the side opposite to the drive side end plate 7342). ) is mainly provided with a power switching hole 6355b drilled toward the With this configuration, the second gear 6355 includes an opening in which the recessed portion 6355a and the power switching hole 6355b are connected.

Note that the configurations of the shaft support 6342b and the second gear 6355 are the same as those of the shaft support 6342b and the second gear 6355 in the sixth embodiment, except that the length in the axial direction is shortened, so they will not be described here. omitted.

Regarding the action of the shaft support 6342b and the second gear 6355, the driving force of the drive motor 350 is transmitted to the shaft support 6342b or not, depending on the rotation direction of the second gear 6355, as in the sixth embodiment. It is possible to switch between the two cases.

The engagement member 7345 includes a main body 7345a formed in a fan-shaped plate shape, a through hole 7345b formed with a circular cross section in the thickness direction near the apex of the main body 7345a, and a through hole 7345b having a circular cross section from the outer circumference of the main body 7345a. It mainly includes an extending portion 7345c that extends outward in the direction, and a pivot pin 7345d that is a cylindrical member that is commonly inserted into the through hole 7345b and the pin support recess 7341c2.

The top side (the side where the through hole 7345b is arranged) of the main body part 7345a is accommodated in the notch 7341c1 on the axially outer side of the second gear 6355, and the through hole 7345b and the pin support recess 7341c2 are aligned in a straight line. Placed. In this arrangement, the engagement member 7345 can rotate (swing) around the rotation axis of the fixed shaft 7341 by inserting the shaft support pin 7345d into the through hole 7345b and the pin support recess 7341c2.

The role of the engaging member 7345 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. 62(a) is a side view of the container 7330 viewed from the side of the engaging member 7345, and FIG. 62(b) is a front view of the container 7330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62(a). be. Note that FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b) show a state in which the side wall body 332, partition wall body 334, and decoration body 335 are removed, and in FIG. 62(b), the vicinity of the engaging member 7345 is partially removed. A cross-sectional view is shown.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), a transmission gear 7352 is interposed between the drive gear 351 and the first rotating body 7340a, and an intermediate gear 7354 is interposed between the first rotating body 7340a and the second rotating body 7340b. Intervened.

The transmission gear 7352 and the intermediate gear 7354 include convex portions 7352a and 7354a that protrude outward along the axial direction at eccentric positions. The convex portions 7352a and 7354a are capable of abutting in the circumferential direction with the extending portions 7345c of the engagement members 7345 of the rotating bodies adjacent to each other on the upper side. Note that the second gear 6355 and the first gear 7352, which is common to the second gear 6355 except for having a different outer diameter, are rotated counterclockwise in side view (see FIG. 62) due to the shape of the power switching hole 6355b. (a) counterclockwise) (when the transmission gear 7352 and intermediate gear 7354 rotate clockwise in side view), driving force is transmitted to the shaft support 6342b and the drive side end plate 7342.

In other words, when the second gear 6355 and the first gear 7352 rotate clockwise when viewed from the side (when the transmission gear 7352 and the intermediate gear 7354 rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the side), the shaft support 6342b and the drive side end No driving force is transmitted to the face plate 7342, and the pair of rotating bodies 7340a and 7340b are in a stopped state.

In FIG. 63, the rotation of the fixed shaft 7341 is illustrated in chronological order. 63(a), 63(c), 63(e), and 63(g) show the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 that are visible along the axial direction from the drive side end plate 7342 side. FIG. 63(b) is a side view, and FIG. 63(b) is a front view of the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63(a), and FIG. 63(f) is a front view of the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIf in FIG. 63(e). FIG. FIG. 63(h) is a front view of the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIh in FIG. 63(g).

63(a) and 63(b), the convex portion 7352a is shown separated from the extension portion 7345c, and FIG. 63(c) and FIG. 63(b), the transmission gear 7352 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount, the convex portion 7352a comes into contact with the extension portion 7345c, and the extension portion 7345c is moved by a predetermined amount. 63(e) and 63(f), the transmission gear 7352 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIGS. 63(c) and 63(d), and the convex portion 7352a is about to separate from the extending portion 7345c. In FIGS. 63(g) and 63(h), the transmission gear 7352 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of FIGS. The figure shows a state in which the posture of the fixed shaft 7341 is restored by the force when the fixed shaft 7341 is separated from the fixed shaft 7345c.

In addition, in FIGS. 63(a), 63(c), 63(e), and 63(g), the illustration of the outside of the notch 7341c1 of the drive side shaft portion 7341c is omitted, and the notch 7341c is shown as a solid line. , and illustration of the first gear 7353 is partially omitted.

In FIG. 63(a), the engaging member 7345 is in a position where its center of gravity is located below the pivot pin 7345d due to gravity, and in this position, the rear side of the engaging member 7345 (left side in FIG. 63(a)) The notch 7341c1 is formed in such a manner that one side surface of the notch 7341c1 is in contact with the side surface of the notch 7341c1. Therefore, the front side (right side in FIG. 63(a)) of the engagement member 7345 and the other side of the notch 7341c1 are separated from each other.

When the transmission gear 7352 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63(a), the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 7353 to the shaft support 6342b, and the first rotating body 7340a rotates. At this time, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 63(a), even if the convex portion 7352a pushes the extension portion 7345c of the engaging member 7345, the posture change of the engaging member 7345 is within the range of the notch 7341c1. Therefore, the fixed shaft 7341 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 63(b).

On the other hand, when the transmission gear 7352 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63(a), the driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 7353 to the shaft support 6342b, and the first rotating body 7340a does not rotate. Therefore, the display of the first rotating body 7340a that is visually recognized by the player is not changed, and there is a possibility that the performance effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the transmission gear 7352 is rotated counterclockwise, the convex portion 7352a comes into contact with the engagement member 7345, and the engagement member 7345 pushes the side surface of the notch 7341c1, so that the drive side The shaft portion 7341c rotates (see FIGS. 63(a), 63(c), and 63(e)). Therefore, since the fixed shaft 7341 rotates, the direction of the LED 344 changes, thereby changing the light emitting state of the first rotating body 7340a that is visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Note that the fixed shaft 7341 is biased by a biasing means (not shown) in a manner to maintain the state of FIG. 63(a), so the state of FIG. 63(e) changes to the state of FIG. 63(g), and the convex portion When the load from 7352a to extended portion 7345c is removed, fixed shaft 7341 returns to the state shown in FIG. 63(h).

That is, although the driving force is transmitted to the fixed shaft 7341 in one direction, the operation of the fixed shaft 7341 is not limited to rotating in one direction, and as in this embodiment, the LED 344 is reciprocated when viewed from the front. It is also possible to operate (reciprocatingly swing) the fixed shaft 7341 in this manner.

As a result, by changing the rotation direction of one drive motor 350, it is possible to independently drive different performance members, namely the first rotary body 7340a and the fixed shaft 7341, and the direction of the driving force is reciprocating. By using the fixed shaft 7341 to reverse the motion, it is possible to create an effect that at first glance appears to require a pair of drive devices. Therefore, the presentation effect of the first rotating body 7340a can be improved (the presentation can be complicated) without increasing the number of drive motors 350.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotational force is transmitted to the pair of rotating bodies 340a, 6340b by the pair of transmission paths FL1, FL2, but in the eighth embodiment, the pair of rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b are driven Depending on the rotational direction of the motor 350, it is possible to switch whether the rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b rotate or the shielding device 8380 operates. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is an exploded front perspective view of a container 8330 and a pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, in the container 8330, the upper parts of the side walls 8332, 8333 and the partition wall 8334 are extended forward, and the upper part of the decorative body 8335 is bent forward, so that the shielding device 8380 The space that supports the is constructed.

The side wall body 8333 has a winding through which the shaft of the shielding member 8380 is inserted, and which generates a rotational urging force in one direction (in this embodiment, the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side in FIG. 64) with respect to the shaft of the shielding member 8380. A removing device 8333b is provided.

The partition body 8334 includes a guide groove 8334b, which is a recess that is offset a predetermined amount rearward from the front end surface and extends in the vertical direction. Note that a recessed portion facing the guide groove 8334b is also formed on the inner surface of the side wall body 8333. The cylindrical member 8383 of the shielding member 8380 slides inside the guide groove 8334b and moves in the vertical direction. This can prevent a shielding member 8380, which will be described later, from interfering with the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b.

The decorative body 8335 includes an L-shaped hook-shaped locking device 8335b on the back side near the lower end of the opening 335a. The locking device 8335b can be switched between a locked state (see FIG. 66(d)) and a released state (see FIG. 67(b)) using a notch mechanism.

The shielding device 8380 is a device that changes the area of the flat part of the cloth by spreading or winding up the cloth member wound around the shaft. a guide groove 8334b extending in one end of the cloth member 8382 in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the rotating shaft 8381, and having both ends disposed in the side wall body 8333 and the partition wall body 8334. It mainly includes a cylindrical member 8383 that is inserted through the rotary shaft 8381 and used as a weight, and a switching gear 8384 that forms a one-way clutch between the rotary shaft 8381 and switches whether or not the driving force is transmitted depending on the rotational direction.

The rotation shaft 8381 is configured to spread the cloth member 8382 by rotating in the forward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 65(a)). The rotating shaft 8381 is inserted into the winding device 8333b and is biased in the backward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 65(a)).

In this embodiment, in the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, the shaft portion on the right side in front view is the shaft portion 341 of the first embodiment, and the shaft portion on the left side is the shaft portion 6341a of the sixth embodiment. Accordingly, the end plate 342 of the first embodiment is disposed on the right side in front view, the end plate 6342 of the sixth embodiment is disposed on the left side in front view, and the end plate 6342 of the sixth embodiment is disposed on the left side in front view. The second gear 6355 of the sixth embodiment (and the first gear 8353, which is formed the same as the second gear 6355 except for the outer shape of the gear) is provided. That is, depending on the rotational direction of the drive motor 350, a case where the rotational driving force is transmitted from the second gear 6355 to the rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b and a case where the rotational driving force is not transmitted are switched.

65(a) is a side view of the container 8330 as seen in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64, and FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the container 8330 as seen in the direction of arrow LXVb in FIG. 65(a). . Note that in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b), the side wall body 8332 and the partition wall body 8334 are illustrated in a removed state, and illustration of the decorative body 8335 is partially omitted.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), an intermediate gear 8356 is disposed between the second gear 6355 and the switching gear 8384 of the shielding device 8380 so as to be pivotally supported by the partition wall 8334.

In this embodiment, the one-way clutch gear described in the sixth embodiment is disposed in the first gear 8353, the second gear 6355, and the switching gear 8384, and the direction in which power is transmitted is the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355. and switching gear 8384, the direction is reversed.

More specifically, when the drive gear 351 rotates counterclockwise (hereinafter referred to as "positive direction" in this embodiment) in FIG. While the driving force is transmitted to the rotating shaft 8381, the driving force is not transmitted from the switching gear 8384 to the rotating shaft 8381. On the other hand, when the drive gear 351 rotates clockwise (hereinafter referred to as "reverse direction" in this embodiment) in FIG. While the driving force is not transmitted, the driving force is transmitted from the switching gear 8384 to the rotating shaft 8381 (the cloth member 8382 is stretched).

Therefore, depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor 350, it is possible to switch between rotating the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b or operating the shielding device 8380. As a result, for example, the shielding device 8380 is fixed in an extended state (see FIG. 66(d)), and the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are rotated (the rotating table is moved) while the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are not visible to the player. ) can be done. In this state, by rotating the cloth member 8382 slightly to form a desired stopped state, and then winding up the cloth member 8382, the rotation period of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b that are visible to the player can be shortened, and the game This makes it difficult for a person to predict where on the rotary table the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are rotating.

Fixing the cloth member 8382 in the stretched state is achieved by the locking device 8335b locking the columnar member 8383. The mechanism will be explained.

A mechanism by which the locking device 8335b locks the shielding device 8380 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. 66(a) to 66(d), FIG. 67(a), and FIG. 67(b) are side views of the shielding device 8380 and the locking device 8335b, illustrating the operation of the shielding device 8380 in chronological order. Note that for convenience of drawing arrangement, illustration of the region between the shielding device 8380 and the locking device 8335b is omitted.

FIG. 66(a) shows a state in which the cloth member 8382 is wound up to the end, and the columnar member 8383 is disposed at the upper end of the guide groove 8334b (see FIG. 64). From this state, when the drive gear 351 (see FIG. 65(a)) is rotated in the opposite direction, the cloth member 8382 spreads and the cylindrical member 8383 descends due to gravity, causing the cylindrical member 8383 to hit the locking device 8335b. (See FIG. 66(b)).

The locking device 8335b has an internal notch mechanism in a locked state (see FIG. 66(c)) in which the columnar member 8383 is locked from above, and in a released state (see FIG. 64) in which it is retracted to the outside of the guide groove 8334b (see FIG. 64). (see FIG. 66(b)).

By further rotating the drive gear 351 (see FIG. 65(a)) in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 66(a), the cylindrical member 8383 pushes the locking device 8335b. As a result, the notch mechanism is pushed down one step, and the locking device 8335b changes to the locked state (see FIG. 66(c)). When the power transmission of the drive motor 350 is canceled in this state, the rotating shaft 8381 is rotated by the winding device 8333b (see FIG. 64), and the cloth member 8382 is about to be wound up, but the cylindrical member 8383 is engaged with the locking device 8335b. By being stopped, the cloth member 8382 is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 66(d).

From here, by rotating the drive gear 351 (see FIG. 65(a)) in the opposite direction again, the cylindrical member 8383 is lowered and the locking device 8335b is pushed forward. As a result, the notch mechanism is pushed down one step (see FIG. 67(a)), and the locking device 8335b is released, so that the cloth member 8382 can be wound up (see FIG. 67(b)).

As a result, even when the driving force transmission to the shielding device 8380 is limited to only when the drive gear 351 (see FIG. 65(a)) rotates in the reverse direction, the shielding device 8380 can be moved back and forth (the cloth member 8382 is spread out). This makes it possible to perform operations such as winding and winding. Therefore, it is possible to drive the shielding device 8380 and the rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b (see FIG. 65(a)) separately while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 (see FIG. 65(a)). .

Note that when winding up the cloth member 8382 from the state shown in FIG. 67(b) using the urging force of the winding device 8333b (see FIG. 65(a)), the rotation of the rotating shaft 8381 (see FIG. 65(a)) is caused by the switching gear. 8384 (see FIG. 65(a)) (switching gear 8384 is rotated counterclockwise), and the first gear 8353 and second gear 6355 (see FIG. 65(a)) are accordingly rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the rotation is transmitted to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (see FIG. 65(a)). Therefore, while the cloth member 8382 is being wound up, the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b continue to rotate.

Therefore, before starting to wind up the cloth member 8382, the number of rotations that the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (see FIG. 65(a)) will rotate until the cloth member 8382 is finished winding is calculated backwards (if the cloth member 8382 is rotated clockwise) ) position (rotary table position), the locking member 8355b is released, and the cloth member 8382 is wound up, so that the rotation bodies 8340a and 8340b are rotated at the same time as the cloth member 8382 is wound up. The bodies 8340a, 8340b can be in a stopped state. As a result, it is possible to produce the effect of matching the end of the operation of the shielding device 8380 (completion of winding of the cloth member 8382) and the end of the operation of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (fixed at the stop position). The presentation effects of 8340a and 8340b can be improved.

Note that in this embodiment, the member having the columnar member 8383 at its tip is made of cloth, but is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of plates may be arranged in series in the sliding direction and strung together in a string. In this case, when pushing down the locking device 8335b with the cylindrical member 8383, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating shaft 8381 to the cylindrical member 8383 using a plurality of hard members such as plates, so the drive motor 350 (see FIG. 65(a)) The locking device 8335b can be pushed down by the driving force of the locking device 8335b.

Therefore, a light weight member can be used for the columnar member 8383, and the load applied to the winding device 8333b and the cloth member 8382 can be reduced. Thereby, the winding device 8333b can be configured as a small device that generates a small force.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. In the eighth embodiment, the drive motor 350 operates the pair of rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b and the shielding device 8380 separately, but in the ninth embodiment, the pair of rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b and the shielding device 8380 are operated separately. It is possible to switch between rotating the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b and operating the rotating plate device 9380. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is an exploded front perspective view of a container 9330 and a pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68, in the container 9330, the side walls 9332, 9333 and the partition wall 9334 protrude to the rear side compared to the first embodiment, and the base body 9331 is bent rearward, so that the rotation plate A space is configured to pivotally support and accommodate the device 9380. Note that in this embodiment, the reflective portion RF of the base 9331 is removed, and an opening 9331a having the same size as the reflective portion RF is formed.

As shown in FIG. 68, the side wall bodies 9332, 9333 are provided with shaft support holes 9332b, 9333b for pivotally supporting each rotary plate of the rotary plate device 9380, and the partition wall body 9334 is provided with shaft support holes 9332b, 9333b for pivotally supporting each rotary plate of the rotary plate device 9380. A slide groove 9334b is provided.

The rotary plate device 9380 includes a plurality of rotary plate members 9381 (four in the present embodiment) arranged vertically and vertically, each having a rotary shaft extending along the left and right sides, and a pair of rotary plate members 9381 that are pivotally supported by a partition wall 9334. A power switching section 9383 composed of an intermediate gear 9382 that is commonly meshed with the rotating plate member 9381 and transmits rotation, a switching gear 9383a that has the same external shape as the intermediate gear 9382, and an interlocking gear 9383b that meshes with the second gear 6355. Mainly prepare for.

The power switching unit 9383 is a device that is pivotally supported by the partition wall 9334 and switches whether power is transmitted to the switching gear 9383a or not, depending on the rotational direction of the interlocking gear 9383b. It is constructed by the one-way clutch mechanism described above.

The rotating plate member 9381 includes a shaft portion 9381a extending in the left-right direction, a rectangular plate-shaped plate portion 9381b extending in the radial direction on a plane passing through the central axis of the shaft portion 9381a, and It mainly includes a rotating gear-shaped gear portion 9381c disposed at one end.

The board portion 9381b has a pattern drawn on its surface, and the surface on which the pattern is drawn faces the player, allowing the player to see the pattern.

In the assembled state, the gear portions 9381c of the upper pair of rotary plate members 9381 are meshed with the switching gear 9383a, and the gear portions 9381c of the lower pair of rotary plate members 9381 are meshed with the intermediate gear 9382.

69(a) is a side view of the container 9330 as seen in the direction of arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear view of the container 9330 as seen in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69(a). . Note that FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 9332, the partition wall body 9334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b), in the rotary plate device 9380, the rotary plate member 9381 is arranged at a position offset vertically by a predetermined amount from the rear of the rotation axis of the rotary bodies 8340a, 8340b. Ru.

Here, if the rotating plate member 9381 is placed behind the rotating shafts of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, even if the plate part 9381b is in a posture with its surface facing the player, there is a gap between the rotating body and the player. Since 8340a and 8340b are interposed, it is impossible for the player to visually recognize the pattern drawn on the surface of the board portion 9381b.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotary plate member 9381 is intentionally not disposed behind the rotary bodies 8340a, 8340b, thereby securing a region for disposing the rotary bodies 8340a, 8340b and reducing member costs. On the other hand, by arranging the rotary plate member 9381 at a position offset vertically by a predetermined amount from the rear of the rotating shaft of the rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b, the player can visually recognize the pattern drawn on the plate part 9381b. Effectiveness can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the plate portions 9381b of the rotating plate members 9381 at the upper and lower ends are in a position with their surfaces facing the player (hereinafter referred to as the "shielding state", see FIG. 69(a)). , is arranged in such a manner that the upper and lower ends of the opening 9381a are shielded from the line of sight of the player who views the housing body 9330 from the front. In addition, the plate portion 9381b of the rotary plate member 9381, which is disposed as a pair in the middle (disposed in the area between the rotational axes of the rotary bodies 8340a and 8340b), is in a position with its surface facing the player (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as the "shielding state" (see FIG. 69(a)), the plate portions 9381b are disposed in such a manner that they are vertically joined together. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the plate portion 9381b of the rotary plate member 9381 is formed to have a width greater than or equal to the width of the opening 9381a in the left-right direction.

As a result, in the shielding state where the surface of the plate portion 9381b is directed toward the player (see FIG. 69(a)), the rotary plate member 9381 shields the opening 9381a, making it impossible for the player to see the rear of the opening 9381a. Become.

Therefore, there is a shielding state in which the surface of the rotary plate member 9381 is directed toward the player, and a state in which the surface of the rotary plate member 9381 is rotated 90 degrees from that state and the end of the plate portion 9381b is directed toward the player (hereinafter referred to as "visible" state). (referred to as "state"), it is possible to greatly change the state visually recognized by the player.

A description will be given of how the drive motor 350 separately drives the rotating bodies 8340a, 8340b and the rotating plate member 9381 using the gear transmission mechanism shown in FIG. 69(a). The drive motor 350 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 69(a) (hereinafter referred to as "forward direction" in this embodiment) and clockwise in FIG. 69(a) (hereinafter referred to as "reverse direction" in this embodiment). ) is a motor configured to be rotatable in both directions.

From the configuration of the one-way clutch mechanism of the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 illustrated in FIG. 69(a), when the drive gear 351 rotates in the forward direction, rotational driving force is transmitted to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, On the other hand, since the drive gear 351 rotates in the opposite direction, the rotational driving force is not transmitted to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b. Here, since one gear is interposed between each of the drive gear 351, the first gear 8353, and the second gear 6355, the rotation direction of the drive gear 351 and the rotation direction of the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 are different. They match (for example, when the drive gear 351 rotates in the forward direction, the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 also rotate in the forward direction). That is, since the rotational direction of the drive gear 351 can be regarded as the same as the rotational direction of the second gear 6355, in FIG. 70, the rotational direction of the second gear 6355 will be described as the rotational direction of the drive gear 351 for simplicity.

70(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the container 9330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and FIG. 70(b) is a partial cross-section of the container 9330 taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). It is a diagram. 70(a) and B12(b) show a state in which the side wall body 9332, the partition wall body 9334, and the decorative body 335 are removed, and in FIG. 70(a), the player A shielded state in which the rear of the vehicle cannot be seen is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), in the power switching section 9383, a switching gear 9383a and an interlocking gear 9383b are formed separately, and a circular saw-shaped tooth profile is disposed on the switching gear 9383a. An engagement piece that can abut in the circumferential direction is provided on the interlocking gear 9383b.

Due to the one-way clutch mechanism formed in this way, when the second gear 6355 rotates in the forward direction (in this state, the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b rotate), the interlocking gear 9383b rotates in the opposite direction, so that the interlocking gear 9383b The driving force is not transmitted from to the switching gear 9383a (the interlocking gear 9383b rotates in the direction in which the engaging piece slides against the circular saw-shaped tooth profile).

On the other hand, when the second gear 6355 rotates in the opposite direction (in this state, the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b stop), the interlocking gear 9383b rotates in the forward direction, and the driving force is transferred from the interlocking gear 9383b to the switching gear 9383a. (The interlocking gear 9383b rotates in the direction in which the engagement piece bites into the circular saw tooth profile in the circumferential direction.) As a result, when the switching gear 9383a rotates, the four rotary plate members 9381 arranged vertically in parallel rotate at the same speed due to the toothing of the gears shown in FIG. The rotating plate members 9381 are the same, and the rotation direction of the lower pair of rotating plate members 9381 is reversed with respect to the upper pair of rotating plate members 9381).

That is, depending on the rotational direction of the drive motor 350, the rotating plate device 9380 can be operated with the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b stopped, and the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b can be rotated with the rotating plate device 9380 stopped. be able to. Therefore, a plurality of members can be operated separately while suppressing the number of drive motors 350.

FIG. 71 is a side view of the container 9330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68. Note that FIG. 71 shows a state in which the side wall body 9332, partition wall body 9334, and decoration body 335 are removed, and also shows a visual state in which the player can view the rear of the rotating board device 9380.

In the state shown in FIG. 71, the player can see the rear of the opening 9331a. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the shaft portion 9381a of the rotating plate member 9381 is arranged at a position hidden by the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (in the range projected by the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b when viewed from the front). Thereby, when the rotary plate device 9380 is brought into the visible state, the rotary plate member 9381 can be retracted behind the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, and the area in which the opening 9331a can be visually recognized can be secured to the maximum extent.

Here, for example, when the rotary plate member 9381 of the rotary plate device 9380 is in a visible state (see FIG. 71), if the container 9330 moves up and down, the rotary plate member 9381 may rotate due to the momentum. In that case, there was a risk that the postures of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b that mesh with the rotating plate member 9381 would be shifted.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the gear ratio of the second gear 6355 to the gear portion 9381c of the rotary plate member 9381 is approximately 2 (12 gear teeth of the gear portion 9381b: 20 gear teeth of the second gear 6355). ). Therefore, even if the rotary plate member 9381 shifts its posture by a predetermined angle, the posture shift of the first rotating body 8340a can be suppressed to about half of that angle, thereby suppressing the sense of discomfort given to the player. Note that the gear ratio is not limited to 2, and as the gear ratio increases, the first rotary body 8340a shifts its posture while the angle of change in posture of the rotary plate member 9381 is more suppressed.

72(a) and 72(b) are partial front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. Note that in FIG. 72(a), the rotating plate device 9380 is in a visible state (see FIG. 71), and in FIG. 72(b), the rotating plate device 9380 is in a shielding state (see FIG. 69(a)).

As shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), when the container 9330 is disposed in front of the opening 211a, the rotary plate device 9380 changes its attitude to rotate the rotors 8340a and 8340b. It is possible to change the visible design in the surrounding gaps.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 72(b), the design drawn on the surface of the plate portion 9381b is visible, while in the state shown in FIG. The display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) provided can be visually recognized. This allows the effects of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b to vary.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 84. In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the rotation axes of the first rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b are arranged parallel to each other in the rotation body lifting unit 300, but the rotation body in the tenth embodiment The axes are arranged perpendicular to each other. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 73 is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit 10300C in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the central unit 10300C, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is disposed below the second rotating body 340b with its axis of rotation perpendicularly intersecting.

Further, the connecting member 325 has an arcuate shape concave toward the back side at a location where the storage body 330 is disposed (the front side of the end of the connecting member 325 opposite to the end where the rack gear 324 is disposed). It includes a circular arc plate member 10370 formed in a circular arc plate member 10370, and a shaft support plate member 10326 extending toward the front side below the circular arc plate member 10370. Note that details of the arc plate member 10370 and its functions will be described later.

The shaft support plate member 10326 has a shaft support hole 10326a formed circularly in the vertical direction at the front end thereof, and has a shape that meshes with the rack gear portion 10331RF2 (see FIG. 76) around the shaft support hole 10326a. and a fixed gear portion 10326b in which gear teeth are formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 10326a.

The container 330 is rotatably supported in the support hole 10326a. As the housing body 330 rotates around the shaft support hole 10326a, the rotation of the vertical shaft rotating body 10340 is controlled through a rectangular window 10333b formed in the center of the side wall body 10333 of the housing body 330. The player can visually recognize the shape and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340.

The fixed gear portion 10326b is fixed to the shaft support plate member 10326. As a result, as described later, as the housing 10330 rotates, the rack gear part 10331RF2 (see FIG. 74) meshed with the fixed gear part 10326b is moved, thereby making the reflecting member 10331RF slidably movable. (See FIGS. 81 to 83).

Furthermore, the fixed gear portion 10326b is formed in a portion hidden behind the back side of the shaft support plate member 10326 when viewed from the front (a portion of the outer peripheral surface centered around the shaft support hole 10326a). Thereby, deterioration of the appearance of the container 10330 when viewed from the front can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 10300C. As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating shaft is supported so as to be guided by a drive motor 10336 and an arcuate plate member 10370, which are formed parallel to the drilling direction of the shaft support hole 10326a, on the back side of the base body 10331 (FIGS. 77 and 74). (see FIG. 76), a guide extension portion 10331e extending toward the back side is formed.

The guide extension portion 10331e is formed in a hook shape with a tip extending downward, and the tip is inserted into the guide hole portion 10373 (see FIG. 77) of the arcuate plate member 10370 to guide the rotation of the container 330. This also has the effect of suppressing the parallel movement (movement in the direction of the paper in FIG. 77) and axis tilting movement of the container 330. The details will be described later.

FIG. 75 is a front exploded perspective view of the container 10330. As shown in FIG. 75, the container 10330 includes a base 10331, left and right side walls 10332 and 10333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base 10331, and a partition wall disposed on the inner surface of the left side wall 332. 10334 and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base 10331, and these parts 10331 to 10334, 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The base 10331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side of the paper in FIG. 75), the top surface, and the bottom surface (the top and bottom sides in FIG. 75) of the container 10330, and is integrally formed by combining three plate-shaped members. . The base body 10331 also includes an upper intermediate plate 10331a that is arranged to face the upper surface of the container 10330 and extends from the back side toward the front side, and a lower side that is disposed at a predetermined interval below the upper intermediate plate 10331a. An intermediate plate 10331b, a lower bottom plate 10331c which is a plate member that is arranged opposite to the lower intermediate plate 10331b and forms the lower surface of the base body 10331, and has a circular cross section in such a manner that it is pushed downward at approximately the center of the lower bottom plate 10331c. A recessed portion 10331d and a guide extension portion 10331e (see FIG. 74) are mainly formed.

In a portion forming the back surface of the container 10330, a reflection section RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed in front between the top surface of the container and the upper intermediate plate 10331a, and a movable A reflecting member 10331RF is disposed in front between the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the lower intermediate plate 10331b.

As a result, the reflecting part RF and the reflecting member 10331RF are separated by the upper intermediate plate 10331a, so that the light emitted from the vertical axis rotating body 10341 and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface are reflected by the reflecting member 10331RF, and the second rotating body The light emitted from 340b and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface can be reflected by the reflection part RF. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the respective lights from being mixed, for example, if the color of the light emitted from the vertical shaft rotating body 10340 and the color of the light emitted from the second rotating body 340b are made different. In addition, it is possible to suppress the colors of the visible lights from mixing, and the light effect of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the light effect of the second rotating body 340b can be viewed independently. Therefore, the effect of the light emitted from each rotating body and the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface can be effectively exhibited.

Further, an extension part 10331RF1 (see FIGS. 74 and 81) extending from the reflecting member 10331RF to the back side extends to the back side of the base body 10331 through a through hole formed on the back side of the base body 10331. It hangs down to the bottom of 10331.

The extending portion 10331RF1 (see FIGS. 74 and 81) is connected to a rack gear portion 10331RF2 (see FIG. 77) which is disposed below the lower end of the container 10330 on the back side of the container 10330 and has parallel gear teeth. Connected and fixed.

The recessed portion 10331d is a portion that rotatably supports the vertical shaft rotating body 10340 and is inserted into the shaft support hole 10326a (see FIG. 73).

In the side wall body 10332, only the upper holding hole 332a is formed, and the lower holding hole 332a (see FIG. 17) is omitted.

The side wall body 10333 includes a rectangular window portion 10333b formed in a rectangular shape at a location facing the vertical shaft rotating body 10340.

In the partition wall body 10334, only the upper insertion hole 334a is formed, and the lower insertion hole (see FIG. 17) is omitted. Further, a first gear 10353 is provided, which is pivotally supported between a transmission gear 352 and an intermediate gear 354, and which transmits driving force through meshing. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the first gear 10353 is formed separately from each rotating body.

The container 10330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 10334, a vertical axis rotating body 10340 and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 350, and a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall body 10334. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 10330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 meshed with the drive gear 351 in order, a first gear 10353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355. and a gear train consisting of a first bevel gear 10356 and a second bevel gear 10357 that are meshed in order in the opposite direction of the gear train.

The transmission gear 352, the first gear 10353, the intermediate gear 354, and the first bevel gear 10356 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the second gear 355 is The second bevel gear 10357 is fixed to the axial end face, and the second bevel gear 10357 is pivotally supported by the lower bottom plate 10331c.

The first bevel gear 10356 includes a spur gear portion 10356a formed in the shape of a spur gear, and a bevel gear portion formed in the shape of a bevel gear disposed on the tip side (on the right side of the paper in FIG. 75) of the spur gear portion 10356a. 10356b.

The spur gear portion 10356a is meshed with the drive gear 351, and the bevel gear portion 10356b is meshed with a second bevel gear 10357 whose rotation axis perpendicularly intersects with each other. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 350 is transmitted to the second bevel gear 10357 with the transmission direction changed by 90 degrees.

By transmitting the driving force to the second gear 10357 with a 90-degree change in this way, the vertical shaft rotating body 10340, which is supported by a rotating shaft parallel to the second bevel gear 10357, and the second rotating body 340b are connected to each other. It can be rotated by a single drive motor 350.

The vertical shaft rotating body 10340 has a rotating shaft 10341 that extends vertically in a cylindrical shape, and a gear shape in which driving force is transmitted from a second bevel gear 10357 via an intermediate gear near the lower end of the rotating shaft 10341. and a triangular prism-shaped body formed from a light-transmitting material near the upper end of the rotating shaft 10341, which rotates around the rotating shaft 10341 as the rotating shaft 10341 is rotated. It mainly includes a display section 10343.

The display section 10343 has a transmissive section PN and a reflective section arranged on each surface, similarly to the second rotating body 340b. Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are arranged inside the display section 10343, and the inner surface of the display section 10343 can be irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs.

Note that the tip of the rotating shaft 10341 on the gear portion 10342 side is formed to be retractable, so when assembling the vertical shaft rotating body 10340 to the housing body 10330, first remove the tip of the rotating shaft 10341 on the display portion 10343 side. is inserted into the shaft support hole 10331a3 of the upper intermediate plate 10331a, and the tip of the rotating shaft 10341 on the gear part 10342 side is pressed against the upper surface of the lower bottom plate 10331c of the base body 331 while recessed, and the rotating shaft is positioned in the recessed part 10331d. By protruding the tip of the gear portion 10342 side of the rotating shaft 10341, the rotating shaft 10341 can be pivotally supported on the base body 10330.

The rotation mechanism of the container 10330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. 76 is a top view of the container 10330 and the arc plate member 10370, FIG. 77(a) is a top view of the container 10330 and the arc plate member 10370, and FIG. ) is a sectional view of the container 10330 and the arcuate plate member 10370 taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb. Note that FIG. 76 shows a state in which the opening 335a faces the front side (bottom side in FIG. 76), and FIG. 77 shows a state in which the rectangular window portion 10333b faces the front side (bottom side in FIG. 77(a)). is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76, the arcuate plate member 10370 includes a curved plate portion 10371 extending in the vertical direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 76) along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 10326a, and the curved plate portion 10371. A plate-shaped lower plate portion 10372 extends from the lower end toward the inner periphery, and a hole is formed in the lower plate portion 10372 in the vertical direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 76) along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 10326a. A guide hole portion 10373 is provided and through which the guide extension portion 10331e is inserted, and a gear tooth 10374 is formed to protrude toward the inner peripheral side of the curved plate portion 10371 and is formed to be able to mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor 10336. Mainly equipped with.

When rotating the container 10330, the drive motor 10336 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 76 from the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive gear of the drive motor 10336 meshes with the gear teeth 10374, and the housing 10330 rotates.

When the container 10330 is rotated, the hook-shaped tip of the guide extension 10331e is inserted into the guide hole 10373 of the arcuate plate member 10370. Since the guide hole portion 10373 is formed in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 10326a, the tip of the guide extension portion 10331e is guided inside the guide hole portion 10373 as the container 10330 rotates. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the accommodation body 10330 from wobbling in the axis tilting direction during rotation.

Further, even when the housing body 10330 is stopped, it is possible to generate resistance against shaft tilting in multiple directions compared to the case where the guide extension portion 10331e is inserted into a straight elongated hole. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 76, not only when the container 10330 is axially tilted in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 76), but also when the container 10330 is axially tilted in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 76). Resistance in the direction opposite to the axis tilting can be provided to the housing body 10330.

Here, when the container 10330 is pivotally supported at both ends in the direction of the rotation axis, a stopper for stopping the rotation of the container 10330 is placed near one of the shaft support positions, and the rotation of the container 10330 is restricted by the stopper. When moving, it is difficult to suppress the part of the container 10330 near the other axial position from flowing due to inertia due to the length of the container 10330 in the rotational axis direction. It becomes necessary to arrange a stopper.

In this case, if the timing at which the container 10330 contacts the pair of stoppers is shifted due to misalignment or wear of the stoppers, there is a risk that the container 10330 will vibrate at the stop position, causing the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body to There was a problem that the production effect could not be effectively exhibited. On the other hand, it is possible to pivotally support the container 10330 at the intermediate portion by inserting the pivot portion into the internal space of the container 10330. There was a problem that the installation area became narrower.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the container 10330 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 10326a, while the intermediate portion in the height direction of the container 10330 is supported by the guide extension part 10331e. Since it is connected to the arcuate plate member 10370 formed in a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the container 10330, it is possible to narrow the interval between the support positions of the container 10330 while ensuring the internal space of the container 10330. can. Thereby, the number of stoppers that stop the rotation of the container 10330 can be suppressed, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the container 10330 from vibrating at the stop position. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the second rotating body 340b and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 can be effectively exhibited.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77(a), when the housing 10330 rotates, the rack gear part 10331RF2 meshed with the fixed gear part 10326b slides in the width direction of the housing 10330 (vertical direction in FIG. 77(a)). Moving. Thereby, as the container 10330 rotates, the reflection member 10331RF connected and fixed to the rack gear part 10331RF2 can be slid (see FIGS. 81 to 83).

Note that in this embodiment, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is arranged in series at a position facing the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b, and the direction in which the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in series (Fig. 76 Since the axis of rotation of the container 10330 is formed along the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper, the rotation radius of the container 10330 can be suppressed compared to a case where the axis of rotation is formed in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction.

78(a) is a side view of the container 10330 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIa in FIG. 75, and FIG. 78(b) is a front view of the container 10330 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). It is. Note that FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 10332, the partition wall body 10334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

Here, when the reflecting member 10331RF is formed from a plurality of mirrors that are consecutively arranged around the vertical axis rotating body 10340 while forming a predetermined angle, the figure that is visually recognized through the mirror is Because of the difference in mirrors, the mirrors are visually recognized as being cut off at the boundaries of adjacent mirrors. Therefore, when the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 that is visible through the reflective member 10331RF and the figure that is drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the second rotating body 340b and that is directly visible to the player are viewed at the same time. The feeling of discomfort increases.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b), the axis (boundary line between the two mirrors) of the shaft support RFC2 (see FIG. 80) of the reflecting member 10331RF is 10340, and is not visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the figures visible on the left and right sides of the vertical shaft rotating body 10340 through the reflecting member 10331RF from being cut by the axis of the shaft support RFC2. As a result, the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the vertical axis rotator 10340 can be made visible as a single plate figure on the entire surface of the reflecting members 10331RF arranged on the left and right sides of the vertical axis rotator 10340, respectively. It is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when the figure is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotating body 340b and is viewed at the same time as a figure that is directly visible to the player. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the light irradiated from the light emitting means of the second rotary body 340b is not angularly reflected on the side surface (for example, the side wall body 333) on which the rotation axis of the second rotary body 340b is supported. First, only the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed inside the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is reflected and is visible to the player. That is, the surface of the container 10330 on which the light emitted from the light emitting means of one rotating body is reflected is separated from the surface of the container 10330 on which the light emitted from the light emitting means of the other rotating body is reflected. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), the recessed portion 10331d is formed to have the same thickness as the lower bottom plate 10331c, and has an inner circumferential surface that supports the rotating shaft 10341, and an outer circumferential surface that is fitted into the shaft support hole 10326a. Pivotally supported. Therefore, the rotary shaft 10341 can be used as a reinforcing core (resistance to compressive load in the radial direction can be increased) while improving the moldability of the recessed portion 10331d and the lower bottom plate 10331c, so that the container 10330 can be rotated. It is possible to prevent the recessed portion 10331d from being damaged.

79(a) is a bottom view of the upper intermediate plate 10331a, and FIG. 79(b) is a sectional view of the upper intermediate plate 10331a taken along the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79(a). As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), the upper intermediate plate 10331a includes a main body portion 10331a1 having a rectangular outer shape and made of an opaque resin material, and a front side of the main body portion 10331a1 (see FIG. 79). (a) Upper) A groove 10331a2 recessed around the periphery of the main body 10331a1, and a shaft support hole 10331a3 that is circularly bored in the approximate center of the main body 10331a1 and pivotally supports the vertical rotary body 10340. Mainly equipped with

Since the main body portion 10331a1 is made of an opaque resin material, it can absorb the light emitted from the LED (not shown) disposed inside the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the light emitted from the LED (not shown) disposed inside the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 344 (see FIG. 19) from mixing with the light emitted from the LED 344 (see FIG. 19).

The groove portion 10331a2 is a recessed portion in which the shaft support RFC2 and the like (see FIG. 80) that protrudes upward from the reflecting member 10331RF is guided, and is located on the side where the rectangular window portion 10333b is formed (see FIG. 79(a) The right side) is curved, and the opposite side of the rectangular window portion 10333b (the left side in FIG. 79(a)) is bent vertically.

Note that the upper intermediate plate 10331a may be integrally molded with the base body 331 (see FIG. 77), or may be formed as a separate member and fastened and fixed to the base body 331.

Further, the upper surface of the main body portion 10331a1 may be formed in a mirror shape. Thereby, the upper intermediate plate 10331a can reflect the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the second rotating body 340b, making it visible to the player.

79(c) is a top view of the lower intermediate plate 10331b, and FIG. 79(d) is a sectional view of the lower intermediate plate 10331b taken along the line LXXIXd-LXXIXd in FIG. 79(c). As shown in FIGS. 79(c) and 79(d), the lower intermediate plate 10331b is a main body portion formed in a U-shaped plate shape with a cutout in the center on the front side (lower side in FIG. 79(c)). 10331b1, and a groove portion 10331b2 recessed around the front (lower part in FIG. 79(c)) of the main body portion 10331b1, avoiding the central portion.

The groove portion 10331b2 is a recessed portion in which the shaft support RFC2 and the like (see FIG. 80) projecting downward from the reflecting member 10331RF is guided, and is formed in a shape that is a mirror image of the groove portion 10331a2.

A notch in the center of the main body portion 10331b1 is a notch in which the rotating shaft 10341 is arranged (see FIG. 78(b)).

FIG. 80(a) is a front perspective view of the reflecting member 10331RF, and FIG. 80(b) is a partially exploded front perspective view of the reflecting member 10331RF, showing the connecting portion of the reflecting member 10331RF in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the reflecting member 10331RF includes a plate-shaped central reflecting member 10331RFC arranged at the center, and a plate-shaped right reflecting member 10331RFR connected to the right side of the central reflecting member RFC in front view. , a plate-shaped left reflecting member 10331RFL connected to the left side of the central reflecting member RFC in front view.

The central reflecting member 10331RFC mainly includes a main body RFC1 formed in a rectangular plate shape and cylindrical shaft supports RFC2 disposed at the upper and lower corners of the main body RFC1.

The shaft support RFC2 is a part guided inside the groove 10331a2 (see FIG. 79(a)), and has an outer circumferential diameter that is equal to the groove 10331a2 (see FIG. 79(a)) of the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the lower intermediate plate 10331b. The width of the groove 10331b2 (see FIG. 79(c)) is slightly smaller than that of the groove 10331b2 (see FIG. 79(c)).

The left reflecting member 10331RFL includes a main body RFL1 formed in a rectangular plate shape, a protruding part RFL2 protruding outward in the vertical direction from the upper and lower corners of the main body RFL1 on the side of the central reflecting member 10331RFC, and a protruding part RFL2. It mainly includes cylindrical pin portions RFL3 that protrude in the vertical direction from two corners excluding the corner where RFL2 is formed.

The protruding portion RFL2 is a portion inserted into the inner peripheral side of the pivot support RFC2, and its diameter is made slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the pivot support RFC2. Note that the protruding portion RFL2 is formed to be retractable from the main body portion RFL1, and when attached to the central reflecting member 10331RFC, the main body portion RFL1 is placed between the central reflecting members 10331RFC in a recessed state, and the protruding portion RFL2 is retracted from the central reflecting member 10331RFC. It is arranged at a position where the axis of the portion RFL2 and the axis of the shaft support RFC2 match (the protruding portion RFL2 protrudes at that position).

The pin portion RFL3 is a portion guided inside the groove portion 10331a2 of the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the groove portion 10331b2 of the lower intermediate plate 10331b (see FIGS. 79(a) and 79(c)), and has an outer circumferential diameter equal to that of the groove portion. The width is made slightly smaller than the width of the groove portion 10331a2 and the groove portion 10331b2.

In a state where the protruding portion RFL2 is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the shaft support RFC2, the reflecting member 10331RF is arranged between the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the lower intermediate plate 10331b, and the shaft support RFC2 and the pin portion RFL3 are inserted into the groove. By being inserted into 10331a2 and 10331b2, the reflecting member 10331RF can be made integrally movable.

Note that the configuration of the right reflecting member 10331RFR is bilaterally symmetrical to that of the left reflecting member 10331RFL, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the sliding movement of the reflecting member 10331RF accompanying the rotation of the container 10330 will be described. In addition, in FIGS. 81 to 83, the container 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are schematically shown in cross section, and for easy understanding, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is Only outline lines are shown.

81(a), FIG. 82(a), and FIG. 83(a) show the storage body 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 along the line LXXXIa-LXXXIa in FIG. 78(b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

FIG. 81(b) is a partial front view of the container 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIb in FIG. 81(a). , FIG. 83(b) is a partial front view of the container 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIIb in FIG. 82(a), and FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the container housing 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflective member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 when viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIIIb.

Note that FIG. 81 shows a state in which the container 10330 is in an assembled state with the opening 335a (see FIG. 75) facing the front, and FIG. 83 shows a state in which the container 10330 is rotated by a predetermined angle, and FIG. 83 shows a state in which the container 10330 is in a posture with the rectangular window portion 10333b facing forward.

As described above, the upper intermediate plate 10331a functions as a portion that pivotally supports the rotating shaft 10341. Here, the upper intermediate plate 10331a is provided for the purpose of preventing the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b from being mixed together, and for the purpose of pivotally supporting the vertical axis rotating body 10340. be done. The narrower the interval between the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b, the easier it is to express a sense of unity in the performance of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b, so the upper intermediate plate 10331a should be made thinner. On the other hand, if the upper intermediate plate 10331a is too thin, it will not have sufficient strength to pivotally support the vertical shaft rotating body 10340, so it is preferable that the upper intermediate plate 10331a is thick. I had a task to do.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81(b), the upper intermediate plate 10331a is supported by the reflective member 10331RF that is bent between the lower intermediate plate 10331b, so the reflective member 10331RF can improve the rigidity of

As a result, the upper intermediate plate 10331a, which is disposed in order to prevent the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b that are visually recognized through the reflection member 10331RF, from being mixed up, is moved from the vertical axis rotating body 10340 to the vertical axis rotating body 10340. The thickness can be suppressed while maintaining the strength for use as a supporting member, and the distance between the vertical shaft rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b can be narrowed. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), according to this embodiment, when the container 10330 is placed in a position with the opening 335a (see FIG. 75) facing the front, the reflection Light is reflected by the member 10331RF, and the figure placed on the back side of the display section 10343 becomes visible.

Here, when the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b are housed in the container 10330 in such a manner that their rotation axes intersect at right angles, the length of the second rotating body 340b in the rotation axis direction and the length of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are determined. By matching the diameter of the rotation locus, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b can be visually recognized by the player without any discomfort.

However, for example, as in this embodiment, when the axial length of the second rotating body 340b is longer than the diameter of the rotation locus of the second rotating body 340b, the diameter of the rotation locus of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is longer than the diameter of the rotation locus of the second rotating body 340b. Since it is longer than the rotation trajectory of the rotating body 340b, compared to the case where the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel (in this case, the pair of rotating bodies 340b and 10340 are assumed to have the same shape). There was a problem that the container 10330 became large.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the length of the second rotating body 340b in the axial direction is longer than the length of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) (see FIG. 81(b). (see), since the lengths of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) are the same, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 extends in the front-rear direction of the second rotating body 340b. is suppressed, so the size of the container 10330 can be suppressed.

In addition, a mirror-like reflecting member 10331RF that reflects the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is arranged on a portion of the inner surface of the container 10330 that faces the outer circumferential surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340. The total length of the reflecting member 10331RF and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 in the horizontal direction is the same as that of the second rotating body 340b in the axial direction of the second rotating body 340b (FIG. 81(b)). (see), the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b can be visually recognized by the player without any discomfort.

In this case, of the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340, a portion that is reflected on the reflecting member 10331RF, which cannot be directly seen from the front, is drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the second rotating body 340b. Among the figures, the part facing the front of the container 10330 is visually recognized as one (for example, the alphabet "A", etc., is visible throughout the inside of the opening 335a), so that a natural effect is created. I can do it. Therefore, the effect of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

Moreover, because of this configuration, the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 that is visible through the reflecting members 10331RF placed on the left and right sides of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is also rotated in the same way as the vertical axis rotating body 10340. Since the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is visually recognized as if another rotating body is successively installed on the left and right sides of the vertical axis rotating body 10340.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), most of the rectangular window portion 10333b is blocked by the right side reflective member 10331RFR, and it is possible to suppress the rectangular window portion 10333b from being visually recognized when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to suppress light from leaking in from other presentation members through the rectangular window portion 10333b.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), when the container 10330 rotates, the reflecting member 10331RF slides by the mechanism described above in FIGS. 77 and 76. At this time, by moving the right reflecting member 10331RFR in the direction of retreating from the rectangular window portion 10333b, the inner (front side) surface of the reflecting member 10331RF can be visually recognized from outside the rectangular window portion 10333b. Therefore, the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 reflected on the reflection member 10331RF can be visually recognized through the rectangular window portion 10333b.

As shown in FIGS. 83(a) and 83(b), when the rectangular window 10333b of the container 10330 is directed toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 83(a)), the right reflecting member 10331RFR has a rectangular shape. It is retracted to the outside of the window portion 10333b, and the extension direction of the left reflecting member 10331RFL is directed in the left-right direction.

Therefore, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 can be visually recognized through the entire rectangular window portion 10333b, and the size of the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 reflected on the left reflecting member 10331RFL is measured on the vertical axis. By making the left and right sides of the rotating body 10340 the same, it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the left reflective member 10331RFL.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), when the rectangular window portion 10333b of the container 10330 is directed to the front, the second rotating body 340b (see FIG. 78(b)) has its rotation axis directed toward the player. Since the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is in the posture and the outer circumferential surface is not visible, when determining the stopping position of the rotating body, it is sufficient to determine the stopping position using only the vertical axis rotating body 10340. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of storage bodies 10330 are arranged side by side to form a series of patterns at the stop positions of a pair of rotary bodies accommodated in each, the degree of freedom of the stop positions of the rotary bodies (the degree of freedom of the rotary table) It is possible to improve the selection of where to set the stopping position. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

84(a) and 84(b) are top views of the container 10330, and FIG. 84(c) is a front view of the container 10330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIVc in FIG. 84(a). 84(d) is a front view of the container 10330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIVd in FIG. 84(b). Note that FIGS. 84(a) and 84(c) show the opening 335a facing the front, and FIGS. 84(b) and 84(d) show the opening 335a facing the front. ) The container 10330 is shown rotated clockwise when viewed from above.

In the state shown in FIG. 84(a), the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is stopped with one surface of the display section 10343 inclined at an angle θ with respect to the front. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 84(c), the container 10330 is rotated by an angle θ clockwise in a top view from the state shown in FIG. 84(a). By rotating the container 10330 in this way, it is possible to absorb the inclination of one surface of the display section 10343 of the vertical shaft rotating body 10340 with respect to the front.

Here, when the second rotating body 340b and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 rotate at different rotation angles, when the second rotating body 340b and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are stopped, the phases of the two rotating bodies are Requiring matching reduces the number of shapes that can be combined and increases the number of rotations required to create the desired combination of shapes (for example, the rotating table illustrated in FIG. 20 becomes longer). ).

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the container 10330 is rotatable around the rotation axis of the vertical rotary body 10340, and the rotation of the container 10330 absorbs the inclination angle when the container 10330 tilts and stops. be able to. Therefore, the number of shapes that can be combined can be increased (by changing the state of FIG. 84(a) to the state of FIG. 84(c) later, it can be used as a stopping position where the player can visually recognize the shapes). At the same time, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations necessary to make a desired combination of figures appear and make them appear in a short time.

Note that since the container 10330 is formed to be rotatable, for example, by changing the angle in the direction of rotation of the vertical axis rotating body 10340, the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body changes in a manner that can be visually recognized. By attaching a lenticular or the like (a member whose visible figure can be changed depending on the angle formed with the line of sight) to the outer peripheral surface of the body, it is possible to increase the number of visible figures when the rotating body is stopped.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. In the tenth embodiment described above, in the rotary body lifting unit 10300, the radial width of the vertical axis rotary body 10340 is shorter than the length of the second rotary body 340b in the rotation axis direction. The pair of rotating bodies 11340a and 11340b in the embodiment have substantially the same width in the radial direction and length in the axial direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 85(a) is a front view of the container 11330 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 85(b) is a front view of the container 11330 in a posture with the side wall body 10333 of the container 11330 facing forward. . Note that FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 10332, the partition wall body 10334, and the decorative body are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b), in the eleventh embodiment, the base 11331 is formed narrower in width than the base 331 of the first embodiment. Further, in the second rotating body 11340b, the display plate 11343A is formed shorter than each of the display plates 343A to 343C of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b), the left and right sides of the containing body 11330 are displayed before the containing body 11330 rotates (see FIG. 85(a)) and after rotating (see FIG. 85(b)). The widths of the two are assumed to be approximately the same. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7, it is possible to suppress the installation space when a plurality of containers 11330 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and the arrangement interval between the rectangular windows 10333b of each container 11330 after rotation. By narrowing the area, for example, when making the respective related figures visible through the rectangular window portion 10333b of each container 11330, it is possible to make it easier to see the figures together.

As shown in FIG. 85, the housing 11330 has a rotating shaft 11330a extending downward from the lower end of the housing 11330, which is connected to a shaft support plate member 11326 (the fixed gear portion 10326b is omitted from the shaft support plate member 10326 of the tenth embodiment). is rotatably supported on the Note that a rotating gear-shaped interlocking gear 11330b is disposed at the tip of the rotating shaft 11330a, and the rotating shaft 11330a and the interlocking gear 11330b are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall of the container 11330 with screws or the like.

The first rotating body 11340a includes a rotating shaft 11341a and a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear 11342a disposed at the tip of the rotating shaft 11341a.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), the drive motor 350 includes a drive gear 11351 formed from a two-stage gear (a two-stage gear formed from gear teeth in the shape of a rotating gear and gear teeth in the shape of a bevel gear). A transmission gear 11352 formed of a two-stage gear is meshed with the drive gear 11351.

The transmission gear 11352 has bevel gear-shaped gear teeth meshed with the transmission gear 11342a, and as the transmission gear 11352 rotates, the first rotating body 11340a rotates.

The drive gear 11351 includes a bevel gear-shaped bevel gear portion 11351a that is directly connected and interlocked with the drive motor 350, and a spur gear portion 11351b whose rotation is switched depending on the rotational direction of the bevel gear portion 11351a. Specifically, the shaft portion of the bevel gear portion 11351a and the spur gear portion 11351b are connected by the one-way clutch described above, so that, for example, when the drive motor 350 rotates in the forward direction, the spur gear portion 11351b rotates, and when the drive motor 350 rotates in the forward direction, the spur gear portion 11351b rotates in the reverse direction. The spur gear portion 11351b is formed in such a manner that it stops when rotated.

A transmission gear 11356 meshed with the bevel gear portion 11351a is rotatably supported on the bottom wall of the housing 11330.

The transmission gear 11356 includes a spur gear portion 11356a formed in the shape of a rotating gear, and a bevel gear connected to the spur gear portion 11356a at a shaft portion with a one-way clutch, formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and meshed with the bevel gear portion 11351a. It mainly includes a gear part 11356b. To be more specific, the shaft portion of the spur gear portion 11356a and the bevel gear portion 11356b are connected by the one-way clutch described above, so that, for example, when the drive motor 350 rotates in the forward direction, the spur gear portion 11356a stops and rotates in the reverse direction. When rotated, the spur gear portion 11356a is formed in a rotating manner.

That is, depending on the rotational direction of the drive motor 350, either the spur gear portion 11351b or the spur gear portion 11356a can be rotated independently. Note that when the spur gear portion 11351b rotates, the rotating bodies 11340a and 11340b rotate by a transmission mechanism disposed above it, and when the spur gear 11356b rotates, the housing body 11330 rotates due to meshing with the interlocking gear 11330b. .

Incidentally, a torsion spring CS1 etc. made of an elastic material having spring elasticity is used to maintain the attitude of the container 11330 in FIG. 85(a) by urging the gear meshing with the spur gear portion 11356a. A biasing means is provided. One end of the torsion spring CS1 is fixed to the bottom surface of the container 11330, and the other end is locked to a driven gear disposed on the opposite side of the interlocking gear 11330b with the spur gear portion 11356a in between.

FIGS. 86(a) to 86(d) are top views of the container 11330 illustrating the rotation of the container 11330 in chronological order. Note that FIG. 86(a) shows a posture in which the display plate 11343A of the second rotating body 11340b faces the front (see FIG. 85(a)), and FIG. A posture in which the container 11330 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise is illustrated (see FIG. 85(b)), and in FIG. 86(c), the container 11330 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 86(b). A rotated state is shown, and FIG. 86(d) shows a state in which the container 11330 has been returned from the state shown in FIG. 86(c) to the state shown in FIG. 86(b).

As shown in FIG. 86, a locking device 11327 that maintains the posture of the container 11330 is provided on the shaft support plate member 11326.

The locking device 11327 includes a part whose state can be changed in two positions by a notch mechanism, and includes a switch part 11327a that is pressed by the container 11330, and an L-shaped lock part 11327b that changes its posture depending on the state of the switch part 11327a. Equipped with

As shown in FIG. 86(a), a switch portion 11327a is disposed along the back side of the container 11330 to prevent the container 11330 from rotating counterclockwise. When the drive motor 350 rotates and the container 11330 is rotated clockwise, the switch portion 11327a is pressed once on the side wall of the container 11330, and the posture of the lock portion 11327b is changed and the side wall of the container 11330 is rotated. The lock portion 11327b is fitted and the container 11330 is locked (see FIG. 86(b)).

By further rotating the container 11330 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 86(b) (see FIG. 86(c)), the switch portion 11327a is pressed a second time, and the locking portion 11327b is returned to its original position (see FIG. 15). (a)) (see FIG. 86(d)). From this state, the container 11330 is rotated counterclockwise by the urging force of the above-mentioned urging means (not shown) and returns to the state shown in FIG. 86(a). As a result, when the rotating bodies 11340a and 11340b rotate the drive motor 350 in one direction, the rotating bodies 11340a and 11340b rotate the drive motor 350, and when the drive motor 350 rotates in the other direction, the attitude of the container 11330 changes (reciprocating motion). can be done.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a fixed figure is drawn on each of the display boards 343A to 343C of the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 340b, but in the twelfth embodiment, each of the display boards 12A to 12C, 12A' to In 12C', different figures are visible depending on the angle at which the player views. In addition, among the pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b, each display plate of the first rotating body 12340a will be described as the first display plate 12A, the second display plate 12B, and the third display plate 12C, and each of the display plates of the second rotating body 12340b will be described as follows. The display board will be explained using the first display board 12A', the second display board 12B', and the third display board 12C', and the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their explanation will be omitted. do.

FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c) are external views of the first rotating body 12340a in the twelfth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c), the drawings are divided into an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage, and the front view of the first rotating body 12340a is illustrated on the left side of each, and the corresponding first A side view of rotating body 12340a is illustrated. In addition, in the upper stages of FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c), illustration of the upper part from the center of the first rotating body 12340a is omitted, and in the lower stages of FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c), the first rotating body 12340a is The illustration of the lower part from the center of the body 12340a is omitted.

In this embodiment, a graphic changing member RK12 having a structure (so-called "lenticular structure") in which the visible pattern changes depending on the viewing angle is attached to each of the display boards 12A to 12C.
is formed. Note that the predetermined angle at which the visible pattern changes is 60 degrees in this embodiment. The appearance of each of the display boards 12A to 12C will be explained below.

In FIG. 87(a), a description will be given of how the shape of the first display panel 12A changes depending on the viewing angle. The middle part of FIG. 87(a) shows a state in which the first display plate 12A faces the front, and the upper part of FIG. A state in which the display board 12A is arranged downward from the center is illustrated, and in the lower stage of FIG. 87(a), the first rotating body 12340a is tilted back by 60 degrees from the middle stage of FIG. 87(a), and the first display board 12A is The state where it is arranged above the center is illustrated.

Note that in FIGS. 87(b) and 87(c), each display board is illustrated in the same manner as in the condition of FIG. 87(a). That is, FIG. 87(b) shows the second display board 12B viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(c) shows the third display board 12C viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c), the figures displayed on each of the display boards 12A to 12C change into three types depending on the attitude of the first rotating body 12340a.

FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c) are external views of the second rotating body 12340b. In addition, in FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c), the drawings are divided into upper, middle, and lower stages, and the front view of the second rotating body 12340b is shown on the left side of each, and the corresponding second A side view of rotating body 12340b is illustrated. In addition, in the upper stages of FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c), illustration of the upper part from the center of the second rotating body 12340b is omitted, and in the lower stages of FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c), the illustration of the second rotating body 12340b is The illustration of the lower part from the center of the body 12340b is omitted.

In this embodiment, a shape changing member RK12 having a structure (so-called "lenticular structure") in which the visible pattern changes depending on the viewing angle is attached to each of the display boards 12A' to 12C'. Note that the predetermined angle at which the visible pattern changes is 60 degrees in this embodiment. The appearance of each of the display boards 12A' to 12C' will be explained below.

In FIG. 88(a), a description will be given of how the shape of the first display panel 12A' changes depending on the viewing angle. The middle part of FIG. 88(a) shows a state in which the first display plate 12A' faces the front, and the upper part of FIG. 88(a), the second rotating body 12340b is tilted backward by 60 degrees from the middle stage of FIG. 88(a), and the first display board 12A' is arranged downward from the center. 12A' is shown arranged above the center.

Note that in FIGS. 88(b) and 88(c), each display board is illustrated in the same manner as in the condition of FIG. 88(a). That is, FIG. 88(b) shows a state in which the second display board 12B' is viewed from the front, and FIG. 88(c) shows a state in which the third display board 12C' is seen from the front. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c), the figures displayed on each of the display boards 12A' to 12C' change into three types depending on the attitude of the second rotating body 12340b.

FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c) are external views of a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b. Note that in FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c), a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b are shown in a vertically connected state, with a front view shown on the left side and a side view shown on the right side. be done.

Further, FIG. 89(a) shows a state in which the first display boards 12A, 12A' are directed to the front, and FIG. 89(b) shows a state in which the second display boards 12B, 12B' are directed to the front, FIG. 89(c) shows a state in which the third display plates 12C and 12C' are oriented toward the front.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), when the first display boards 12A, 12A' are facing forward, the "number 7" figure is visible, and as shown in FIG. 89(b), the second display When the boards 12B and 12B' face forward, a "cherry" figure is visible, and as shown in FIG. ” is visible.

FIGS. 90(a) to 90(c) are external views of a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b. Note that in FIGS. 90(a) to 90(c), a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b are shown in a vertically connected state, with a front view shown on the left side and a side view shown on the right side. be done.

Further, FIG. 90(a) shows a state in which the pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b have been rotated forward by 60 degrees (counterclockwise in the side view) from the state of FIG. 89(a), and FIG. In b), a state in which the pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b are rotated forward by 60 degrees from the state in FIG. 89(b), and in FIG. The rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b are shown rotated 60 degrees in the forward rotation direction.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), when the tops between the first display boards 12A, 12A' and the second display boards 12B, 12B' are oriented toward the front, the "lightning" figure is visible, and As shown in FIG. 90(b), when the tops of the second display boards 12B, 12B' and the third display boards 12C, 12C' are oriented toward the front, the "bell" shape is visible; ), when the tops between the first display boards 12A, 12A' and the third display boards 12C, 12C' are oriented toward the front, an "oval" figure is visible.

As shown in FIG. 90, when a figure is viewed in a direction facing the top of each rotating body 12340a, 12340b, the figure that is viewed is a figure related to a pair of display boards adjacent to the top (for example, A figure that is visible when the first display plate 12A is placed facing downward (see the upper part of FIG. 87(a)) and a figure that is visible when the first display plate 12B is placed facing upward (see FIG. 87(b) ) (see bottom row) and the "lightning bolt" shape is visible).

Therefore, while the first rotating body 12340a and the second rotating body 12340b are made into triangular prism-shaped bodies, the stopping position is configured not only when each surface stops in front, but also when stopping with the top located in front. can do. As a result, the number of combinations of the stopping positions of the first rotating body 12340a and the second rotating body 12340b can be reduced to the square of 3 (stopping only the postures in which each display board 12A to 12C, 12A' to 12C' faces forward). position) to the square of 6 (when the state in which the tops of the display boards 12A to 12C and 12A' to 12C' are directed toward the front is also defined as the stop position).

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. In the twelfth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the visually recognized figure changes every time each display board 12A to 12C, 12A' to 12C' in the twelfth embodiment rotates 60 degrees, but each display board in the thirteenth embodiment The display boards 13A to 13C and 13A' to 13C' are figures having a structure (so-called "lenticular structure") that allows different figures to be viewed by slightly changing the viewing angle (approximately 12 degrees) for the player. The variable member RK13 is pasted.

In addition, among the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b, each display plate of the first rotating body 13340a will be explained as the first display plate 13A, the second display plate 13B, and the third display plate 13C, and each of the display plates of the second rotating body 13340b will be explained as follows. The display board will be explained using the first display board 13A', the second display board 13B', and the third display board 13C', and the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their explanation will be omitted. do.

FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) are external views of a first rotating body 13440a in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c), a front view of the first rotating body 13440a is shown on the left side, and a side view of the first rotating body 13340a corresponding to the right side is shown. Further, in FIG. 91(a), a state in which the first display plate 13A is directed to the front is illustrated, and in FIG. 91(b), the first rotating body 13440a is rotated at a slight angle θ( FIG. 91(c) shows a state in which the first rotating body 13440a is tilted forward by a slight angle θ (approximately 12 degrees) from the state in FIG. 91(a). .

As shown in FIG. 91(a), an "apple" shape is illustrated on the first display board 13A. In FIGS. 91(b) and 91(c), the size of the "apple" shown in FIG. 91(a) when viewed as is is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the lenticular structure of the shape changing member RK13 is shown. The size of the "apple" figure that is actually visually recognized is shown by a solid line.

Here, in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c), the "apple" shapes are visually recognized to have a common size. That is, even when the rotating body 13340a is slightly rotated, the same figure can be seen in the same size, so the stopping positions of the pair of rotating bodies 13440a and 13440b are slightly shifted (see FIG. 21(b)). ), it is possible to suppress the appearance of discomfort in the visually recognized figure.

On the other hand, by configuring the lenticular structure of the figure changing member RK13 in such a manner that the figure visually recognized on the first display board 13A becomes a different figure by slightly tilting the first rotating body 13440a, it is possible for the player to It is possible to make it appear as if different figures are visible on the same surface (for example, the first display panel 13A). At this time, since the angle of inclination of the first rotating body 13440a is slight, the player does not notice that the visible angle has changed, and it appears as if the figure on the same display board 13A has suddenly changed. can be shown.

FIGS. 92(a) to 92(c) are side views of the container 13330 in which the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b are stopped after rotation. In addition, in FIG. 92, the container 13330 is schematically illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which the container 13330 is placed at an intermediate position of the device 81 (see FIG. 2) is illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which the container 13330 is placed in the middle position is illustrated, and in FIG. 92(c), the container 13330 is placed in the lower position slightly lowered in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) from the state in FIG. 92(b). The state shown in FIG.

In FIG. 92(b), since the angle between the vertical direction of the player's line of sight and the first display board 13A is the angle θ, the player can see the first display board 13A in the state shown in FIG. 92(a). An "apple" shape (see FIG. 91(b)) is visually recognized, which is the same as the shape visually recognized in .

On the other hand, in FIG. 92(c), since the angle formed by the vertical direction of the player's line of sight and the first display board 13A is the angle 2θ, the visible figure is visually recognized in FIG. 91(a). Changes from the shape of an "apple". On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the first rotary body 13340a is tilted backward by the angle θ, the normal direction of the first display board 13A changes to the player's line of sight, and the normal direction of the first display board 13A changes to the side of the player's line of sight. Since the angle formed with the first display board 13A is defined as the angle θ, the player sees the "apple" shape (Fig. 91(b)) is visible. As a result, the angle at which the first rotating body 13340a is tilted backward can be suppressed (changed from the angle 2θ to the angle θ), so that the first display plate 13A can be The speed required for the first rotary body 13340a to fall backward can be suppressed in order to keep the appropriate figure visible. Therefore, the performance required for the drive motor 350 can be suppressed.

Note that the height of the player's line of sight may be detected by a detection device such as a camera provided in the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1). This allows the game machine to detect differences in the direction of the player's line of sight due to differences in the player's physique, and each rotation to make the angle between the vertical direction of the player's line of sight and the display board 13A equal to the angle θ. The inclination angle of bodies 13340a and 13340b can be corrected.

FIG. 93 shows an example of a graphic that is visible through the first display plates 13A, 13A' of the rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b. 93(a) and 93(b) are front views of a pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. Note that in FIG. 93, illustration of the axially outer portions of the end plates 342 of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b is omitted. Furthermore, in FIG. 93(a), a state in which the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b are visible to the player is illustrated when the container 13330 is placed in the upper position (see FIG. 92(a)). In (b), on the premise that the eye height in FIG. 93 (a) and the player's eye height do not change, the case where the container 13330 is placed at the lower position below the upper position (see FIG. 92 ( (c)) shows a state in which a pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b are visually recognized by a player.

Here, in the state shown in FIG. 92(a), it is necessary to create a gap between the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b that the player visually recognizes in order to maintain the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. There is. Therefore, even if each display surface (for example, the first display surface 13A, 13A') of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b displays a figure that only becomes meaningful when viewed together, the pair of rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b Since it is difficult to fill the gap between 13340b, this results in a reduction in the presentation effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(a), for example, the shape changing member RK13 attached to each of the rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b can be used to create a figure that has a meaning individually (for example, a pair of rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b). By displaying an "apple" shape on each of the two rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b, the shapes are prevented from being separated by the gap between the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b, and the presentation effect can be maintained.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 92(c) (a state in which the display surface 13A is lowered downward relative to the player's eye level, so that the angle formed by the player's line of sight and the display surface 13A is angle θ) ), the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b that are visible to the player are changed in posture by a predetermined angle, and the gap between the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b from the player is filled (in the direction perpendicular to the player's line of sight). It is visually recognized in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the end plate 342 of the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b is along. Therefore, it is only when the display surfaces (for example, the first display surfaces 13A, 13A') of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b are visually recognized as one body by the shape changing member RK13 attached to each rotating body 13340a, 13340b. A meaningful figure (for example, a figure with the number "7" written on the entire display surface 13A, 13A' of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b as one surface, see FIG. 93(b)) By displaying and making visible to the player, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b.

That is, depending on the viewing angle of the shape changing member RK13 pasted on the display surfaces 13A, 13A', it may be a shape that is completed on each display surface 13A, 13A' (for example, an "apple" shape, see FIG. 93(a)); By making it possible for the player's eyes to see the figures that make sense only when the display surfaces 13A and 13A' are viewed together (for example, the figure of the number "7", see FIG. 93(b)), Under the premise that the height is constant, the performance effect of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b that move up and down can be improved.

94(a) to 94(c) are side views of the container 13330. In addition, in FIG. 94, the container 13330 is schematically illustrated, and in FIG. 94(a), the container 13330 is arranged at an upper position directly facing the player's line of sight in the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1). FIG. 94(b) shows a state in which the container 13330 is placed at a middle position slightly lowered in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) from the state in FIG. 94(a), and FIG. 94(c) ) shows a state in which the container 13330 is arranged at a lower position that is slightly lowered in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) from the state shown in FIG. 94(b).

FIG. 94 shows a state in which the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b reciprocate in accordance with the vertical movement of the container 13330. That is, in FIGS. 94(b) and 94(c), as the container 13330 descends, the first display board 13A is tilted backwards, and the state in which the player's line of sight and the first display board 13A intersect perpendicularly is maintained. The postures of the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b are controlled in this manner. Further, when the container 13330 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 94(c), control is performed to rotate the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b in the forward rotation direction along with the upward movement (see FIG. 94(b)). .

As a result, assuming that the player's eyes are placed at the same height, the figure that is visible to the player can always be kept the same, so the angle between the player's line of sight and the player's line of sight changes. While adopting a lenticular structure for the first display board 13A, which is easy to use, it is possible to control the player to view the same figure for a long period of time through the first display board 13A. Further, since the first display board 13A perpendicularly intersects the player's line of sight, the graphics displayed on the first display board 13A can be easily seen.

Next, the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the container 13330 slides up and down, but the container 14330 in the fourteenth embodiment is capable of swinging in the direction of falling forward. In the fourteenth embodiment, display boards 13A to 13C and 13A' to 13C' similar to those in the thirteenth embodiment are used as display boards. That is, each of the display boards 13A to 13C and 13A' to 13C' in this embodiment has a structure (so-called " It consists of a "lenticular structure").

In addition, among the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b, each display plate of the first rotating body 13340a is illustrated as a first display plate 13A, a second display plate 13B, and a third display plate 13C, and each of the display plates of the second rotating body 13340b is The display board is illustrated as a first display board 13A', a second display board 13B', and a third display board 13C', and the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their explanations are omitted. do.

95(a) and 95(b) are side views of a container 14330 and a connecting member 14325 (corresponding to the connecting member 325 (see FIG. 12) in the first embodiment) in the fourteenth embodiment. 95 schematically shows the container 14330, FIG. 95(a) shows the container 14330 in an upright state, and FIG. 95(b) shows the container 14330 in an upright state. A state in which the body 14330 is tilted by a predetermined amount is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), in the container 14330, a support portion 14330a provided at the lower end of the back surface is pivotally supported by the connection member 14325, and a support portion 14330b provided at the middle portion of the back surface is supported by the connection member 14325. It is supported by a solenoid device 14370 provided. As the solenoid device 14370 expands and contracts in the front-rear direction, the upper end of the container 14330 is moved in the front-rear direction, and the container 14330 is placed in an upright state (see FIG. 95(a)) and in a tilted state (see FIG. 95(a)). 95(b))).

According to this embodiment, even when the rotation of the first rotating body 13340a and the second rotating body 13340b is stopped, the container 14330 is tilted and the first rotating body 13340a is swung relative to the second rotating body 13340b. By doing so, it is possible to simultaneously correct the angle of the surface of each rotating body 13340a, 13340b and change the length of the gap visually recognized between the first rotating body 13340a and the second rotating body 13340b. can.

That is, in FIG. 95(b), the angle θ at which the container 14330 falls forward is the angle (approximately 12 degrees) at which the shape of the lenticules arranged on each display board 13A, etc. of this embodiment changes. . As a result, the figure that is visually recognized by the player through each display board 13A etc. in the state of FIG. 95(a) is different from the figure visually recognized by the player through each display board 13A etc. in the state of FIG. 95(b). can be set.

Furthermore, the gap H1 between the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b in FIG. 95(a) is changed by the gap H2 (gap H2=gap H1×COSθ). In this way, by shortening the gap between the rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b that is visible to the player, the display boards 13A, 13A', etc. of the rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b can be visually recognized with a narrower interval. The effect of making the figures drawn on each display board 13A, 13A' visible as a whole can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 94, when moving the container 330 up and down to change the angle formed between the display surfaces 13A, 13A', etc. of the rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b and the player's line of sight, The farther apart the container 13330 is, the greater the possibility that the first rotating body 13340a closer to the player's eyes will be in a positional relationship that hides the second rotating body 13340b (see FIG. 94(c)).

On the other hand, in a configuration in which the storage body 14330 is tilted in the front-back direction as in this embodiment, the relationship between the player's eye level and the height of each rotating body 13340a, 13340b does not change much, so one rotation It is difficult to form a positional relationship in which one body overlaps the other rotating body and is visually recognized. Thereby, the effect of each rotating body 13340a, 13340b can be maintained.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. In the eighth embodiment, the cloth member 8382 of the shielding device 8380 is suspended downward by the driving force of the drive motor 350. As the member 8382 is rolled up, the locking device 15335b that fixes the cloth member 8382 is placed above the rotation axis 8381 of the shielding device 8380. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

96(a) to 96(d) are partial side views of the container 15330 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 96(a) shows a state in which the cylindrical member 8383 is held by the locking device 15335b, and in FIG. 96(b), the rotating shaft 8381 is wound up from the state of FIG. 96(a) and the cylindrical member 8383 is 8383 shows a state in which the locking device 15335b is pushed in one step, and FIG. 96(c) shows a state in which the locking device 15335b is placed in the release position and the cylindrical member 8383 is being suspended downward, FIG. 96(d) shows a state in which the locking device 15335b is placed in the release position, the cloth member 8382 is wound up, and the cylindrical member 8383 pushes the locking device one step.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the operation, the engaging piece 6342bt, the intermediate gear 8356, and the switching gear 8384 are illustrated in FIG. 96(a), and the intermediate gear Illustrations of the switching gear 8356 and the switching gear 8384 are omitted.

The locking device 15335b is a member that is disposed on the upper front end surface of the base body 331 and locks both ends (outside of the cloth member 8382) of the cylindrical member 8383 of the shielding device 8380, and is in a locked state ( (see FIG. 96(a)) and a release state (see FIG. 96(c)).

The columnar member 8383 slides along the guide groove 8334b. Further, the switching gear 8384 is configured such that the rotation direction of the one-way clutch mechanism (see FIG. 96(a)) is opposite to that in the eighth embodiment. That is, when the switching gear 8384 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 96(a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating shaft 8381, and the cloth member 8382 is wound upward. Note that when the drive motor 350 (see FIG. 65(a)) rotates in the direction in which the switching gear 8384 rotates clockwise in FIG. 96(a), the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are (see FIG. 65(b)) rotates.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), when the cloth member 8382 is wound up by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. When the driving force for rotating the rotating shaft 8381 is released, the locking device 15335b is placed in the released position (see FIG. 96(c)). Therefore, there is no member supporting the cylindrical member 8383, and the cylindrical member 8383 is, for example, a winding device 8333b (see FIG. 65(b); in this embodiment, the winding device 8333b is disposed in the container 15330, The rotating shaft 8381 is rotated by the urging force of 15330 (which urges the rotating shaft 8381 in a direction to stretch the cloth member 8382), and the cloth member 8382 is stretched.

On the other hand, by winding up the cloth member 8382 from the state in which the columnar member 8383 is further suspended from FIG. 96(c), the columnar member 8383 slides upward along the guide groove 8334b. Then, as shown in FIG. 96(d), the cylindrical member 8383 pushes the part of the notch mechanism of the locking device 15335b one step from the position (released position) shown in FIG. 96(c), so that the locking device 15335b can be placed in a locked position.

As a result, while the shielding device 8380 is driven in one direction, in addition to the function of sliding the columnar member 8383 up and down to extend and contract the cloth member 8382, the columnar member 8383 is locked by the locking device 15335b. It is possible to configure both a state in which the cylindrical member 8383 is released from locking by the locking device 15335b and the cylindrical member 8383 is movable.

In this embodiment, when the locking device 15335b is placed at the locking position, a clamping device (not shown) fixed to the container 15330 clamps the rotating shaft 8381, and its clamping force causes the winding device 8333b to counter the urging force of Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 8382 from being pushed out by the urging force of the winding device 8333b in the state shown in FIG. 96(d).

Another method is to configure the cloth member 8382 in a "blind-like" manner in which highly rigid plate members are connected in the stretching direction, so that the columnar member 8383 is in the state shown in FIG. 96(d). In the arranged state, the rotating shaft 8381 is rotated by the biasing force of the winding device 8333b, and the cloth member 8382 can be prevented from being bent and starting to hang downward. That is, by widening the width in the stretching direction of each plate member configured in a "blind shape" (for example, wider than the distance between the rotating shaft 8381 and the cylindrical member 8383), the rigidity of the plate member allows rotation. The rotation of the shaft 8381 can be stopped, and the state shown in FIG. 96(d) can be maintained.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In each of the embodiments described above, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each have three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the figures on these three surfaces are Although a case has been described in which the player is made to see the screen by combining the above, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the number n of the display surface of the first rotating body 340a and the number m of the display surface of the second rotating body 340b are It may be set to a different value.

In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body lifting unit 300, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b includes the driving gear 351, the transmission gear 352, the first gear 353 , 2353, 3353, intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354, and second gears 355, 2355, 3355, but it is not necessarily limited to this. , 2355, and 3355.

For example, intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 are disposed on the first rotating body 340a, and second gears 355, 2355, 3355 are disposed on the second rotating body 340b in a state where they can mesh with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354. An example of such a structure is that the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gears 355, 2355, 3355. According to this structure, it is possible to reduce the number of gears and reduce component costs.

In each of the embodiments described above, in the rotor lifting unit 300, the base 331 is provided with a reflecting portion RF on the front (inner surface) of the portion that forms the back surface of the container 330 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 18(b)). Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the reflecting section RF may be arranged in other parts. Another example is the inner surface of the portion of the base 331 that forms the upper surface or lower surface of the container 330. These surfaces are surfaces that face the outer circumferential surfaces (each of the display boards 343A to 343C) when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, so the light emitted from the LED 344 is directed to the player. It can be reflected visibly towards the target.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed to have a triangular cross section, when each rotating body 340a, 340b is rotated, the above-mentioned reflection The gap between each inner surface of the base body 441 on which the plate RF is disposed and the outer circumferential surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (vertical interval in FIG. 18(b)) can be increased or decreased, and the reflector plate RF It is possible to change the facing angle of each of the display plates 343A to 343C of each rotating body 340a, 340b with respect to each inner surface of the disposed base 441. Thereby, the mode of the reflected light can be changed for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN as reflected light from the reflection part RF.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the rotational axes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged parallel to each other in the rotating body lifting unit 300, but they are not necessarily limited to this, and are orthogonal. It may be something that you do. This allows the player to, for example, displace (move) the figures drawn on the outer circumferential surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer circumferential surface 340b in directions perpendicular to each other. In this case, each of the display plates 344A to 344C is preferably formed into a square shape when viewed from the front. This is because when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged side by side, a sense of unity can be created between the figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b) disposed in one container 330 in the rotating body lifting unit 300 is two has been described. However, the number is not necessarily limited to this, and the number may be three or more.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the base end sides of the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported on the base body 410, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be formed to be slidable relative to the base body 410. Since the left and right arm bodies 430 can be independently displaced by sliding displacement, it is possible to change the movement of the first member 440, as in each of the above embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that when the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated), Although a case has been described in which the first member 440 is movable relative to the arm member 430 when the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are The displaceably coupled structure may be other structures.

As another structure, for example, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, a rubber-like elastic body, urethane, metal coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.). and a structure that enables relative displacement by elastic deformation of an elastic member, in which the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are rotatably connected by a shaft and a shaft hole, and relative displacement is achieved by rotation of the shaft with respect to the shaft hole. A structure that connects the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 by a spherical ball and a stud that makes spherical contact with the ball, and allows relative displacement by rotation of the ball with respect to the stud. Examples include a structure in which the tip of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or more link mechanisms and relative displacement is possible by deformation of the link mechanisms, and a structure in which a part or all of these are combined. Ru.

In each of the above embodiments, the operation method when placing the central floating unit 400 in the raised position or the lowered position has been described, but each of these operation methods is an example, and it is naturally possible to adopt other operation methods. . Therefore, for example, some of the operating methods shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 may be replaced with other operating methods.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, when the first member 440 is caused to reciprocate (swing) left and right by inertia (action of inertia), the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the left and right reciprocating motion of the first member 440 converges. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the first member 440 forms a reciprocating movement to the left and right without making the player aware of the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocating movement due to inertia is prevented. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game is being continued.

In each of the above embodiments, the arm members 444 in the central movable unit 400 have a symmetrical shape, and the center of gravity is located at the center in the left-right direction. However, the arm members 444 are not necessarily limited to this. The center of gravity may be eccentric to either side in the left or right direction. According to this, it is possible to increase the reaction force acting on the base body 441 as the arm member 444 rotates, thereby increasing the horizontal reciprocating motion (lateral swing) of the first member 440 and providing change.

In each of the above embodiments, in the central movable unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500, 5500, the movement of the first member 440 is controlled by bringing the displacement member 530 into direct contact with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441). Although the case where the movement is restricted or caused to occur in the first member 440 has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. It may also be formed to be able to perform similar operations.

Specifically, a magnet is provided on one of the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, and a magnet is provided on the other of the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or iron member is disposed and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force is applied between one magnet and the other magnet or iron member, thereby causing the first member 440 to move. A structure that restricts the movement of the first member 440 or causes the first member 440 to move is exemplified.

According to this, the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 can be kept out of contact and can avoid contact between the two, so that damage caused by collision can be suppressed. Note that when an iron member is disposed on the other of the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440 , and by balancing the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440, so that the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530. In contact state.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the phase relationship between the second gear 6355 and the second rotating body 6340b is detected using the sensor section 6342c1 constituted by a non-contact magnetic sensor, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, for example, an optical sensor that detects reflected light may be used at the same position. By providing a circumferentially continuous slit in the part of the second gear 6355 where the light from the optical sensor is projected, the period for the light to be reflected and reach the optical sensor can be reduced by the second gear 6355. and the rotating body 6340b. Thereby, the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the rotating body 6340b can be detected.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the stop timing of the drive motor 350 is controlled by the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the end plate 6342, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. The detection portion 6355c is not required, and the biasing force applied to the engagement piece 6342b is large enough to rotate the second rotating body 6340b (opposing the weight of the second rotating body 6340b, 6340b).

Here, if the second gear 6355 is stopped with the engagement piece 6342bt not in contact with the first wall surface 6355b1 but in contact with the middle of the second wall surface 6355b2, the biasing force applied to the engagement piece 6342bt is A load is applied in a direction that rotates the second gear 6355 and the end plate 6342 in the circumferential direction. In this case, the second gear 6355 receives resistance from the plurality of gears that constitute the transmission path FL1, making it difficult to rotate, but in the transmission path FL2, the second gear 6355 and the intermediate gear 2354 are in a slipping state. Therefore, when rotating the end plate 6342, no resistance is generated from the gears forming the transmission path FL2.

Therefore, if the biasing force applied to the engagement piece 6342bt is strong enough to rotate the second rotating body 6340b, the end face plate 6342 can be rotated by the biasing force applied to the engagement piece 6342bt, and accordingly. , the phase between the second gear 6355 and the end plate 6342 can be brought close to the phase at which the engagement piece 6342bt contacts the first wall surface 6355b1.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide groove 8334b extends to the lower end of the opening 335a so that the entire pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b can be shielded by the cloth member 8382. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the guide groove may extend to a position (middle of the opening 335a) that shields only the second rotating body 8340b.

In this case, even if the cloth member 8382 is spread out, the first rotating body 8340a cannot be shielded from the player, but by shielding the second rotating body 8340a, the figures of the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the rotational bodies 8340a and 8340b are in the stopped position. Therefore, while ensuring the effect of making it impossible to determine whether or not the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are placed at the stop position until the cloth member 8382 is wound up, the moving distance of the columnar member 8383 that spreads the cloth member 8382 can be reduced. By making it shorter, it is possible to shorten the period from the shielding state to the visible state.

In the ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotary plate member 9381 of the rotary plate device 9380 takes the shielding state and the visible state. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may also be stopped in an attitude that makes an angle of 45 degrees from . It is assumed that the storage body 9330 is arranged in a position where the player looks down on it, and the surface of the rotary plate member 9381 is configured in such a manner that it looks up on the player.

In this case, for example, by using a member that reflects light in the rotating plate member 9381, even if the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is in the front-rear direction, the light reflected to the rotating plate device 9380 side is rotated by the reflecting part RF. It can be reflected toward the player (directed diagonally upward) on the surface of the plate member 9381. Thereby, it is possible to improve the light production effect while keeping the posture of the LED 344 fixed.

In addition, in this case, by putting the rotating plate member 9381 in a shielding state, the light reflected by the reflecting section RF toward the rotating plate device 9380 side can be reflected to the front side by the surface of the rotating plate member 9381, so that the game When the container 9330 is placed at the same height as the person's line of sight, the effect of light can be improved by putting the rotary plate member 9381 in a shielding state.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the left and right sensor device 600 as an example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate disposed on the front side of the game board at an interval through which a game medium can pass, and a transparent plate displaced on the back side of the game board. a displacement member that is arranged so that it can be seen by a player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced to a position overlapping at least a portion of a detection area of the sensor device.

Here, for example, an optical sensor is provided that includes a light emitting part that emits light toward the front of the game board (plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving part that receives light reflected from an object. Devices that detect the presence or movement of fingers are known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). In this case, the path of the light (irradiated light and reflected light) of the optical sensor is set so as not to overlap the moving area of the displaceable member formed to be displaceable (for example, in paragraph 0045 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). and Figure 5, etc.). Therefore, the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and there is a problem in that the displacement member cannot be used effectively.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced to a position overlapping at least a portion of the detection area of the sensor device, so that the displacement of the displacement member does not affect the detection area of the sensor device. I can do it. In other words, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, thereby making it possible to utilize the displacement member.

Note that the sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, and for example, an optical sensor device (an irradiation means that irradiates light consisting of visible light or invisible light, and a target (object) irradiated from the irradiation means). and a light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by the light receiving means, and evaluating the received light) is exemplified. Methods for evaluating the received light include a trigonometric distance measurement method that converts the imaging position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence or absence (distance) of an object, and the time required from when the light is irradiated to when the light is received. An example is a time-of-flight formula that converts the distance to the presence or absence (distance) of an object.

In gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the displacement member has a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A game machine A2 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position that partitions the area.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is movable to a position that separates the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, so that , these two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of an action that causes the player to select one of these two detection areas.

On the other hand, by retracting the displacement member from a position that partitions the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, it is possible to release the division of these two detection areas by the displacement member. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, a detection area that is detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

In gaming machine A2, the displacement member is capable of displacing an area that overlaps at least one of the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, and as the displacement member is displaced, the displacement member of the first sensor A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection area of the second sensor and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace an area that overlaps at least one of the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor. As the displacement member is displaced, the size of at least one of the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor can be changed. With this, for example, when the player performs an action that causes his/her hand or finger to be detected, the player can be made to search for the detection area.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed to be able to detect that the displacement member is placed at a predetermined position.

According to gaming machine A4, the sensor device is configured to be able to detect that the displacement member is placed at a predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can serve both as a means for detecting an object on the front side of the transparent plate and as a means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and there is no need to provide a separate means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. . Therefore, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts.

Any one of gaming machines A1 to A4 is provided with a light emitting means formed to be able to emit light, and the displacement member is movable to a position where light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device. A gaming machine A5 characterized by the following.

According to the game machine A5, since it is provided with a light emitting means capable of emitting light, effects can be performed by emitting light from the light emitting means. In this case, since the displacement member can be moved to a position where it can block the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light emitting means from being received by the sensor device. As a result, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, erroneous detection by the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, since the displacement member can also be used as a member for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be evacuated from the shielding position and a space can be secured, so that the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to displace. can.

In gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are disposed at different positions, and the displacement member allows light emitted from the light emitting means to enter the sensor device according to a light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the displacement member is movable to a position where it can be shielded.

According to the game machine A6, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means to emit light among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be moved to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented from entering the sensor device. It is possible to prevent light from being received. As a result, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5, erroneous detection by the sensor device can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the case of providing a fixed member capable of blocking light emission from any one of the plurality of light emitting means from entering the sensor device, a large space is required for arranging such a member. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, that space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

The game machine A5 or A6 includes a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the back side of the game board, visible through the opening of the game board, and on which the light emitting means is disposed; The displacement member is characterized in that the displacement member is capable of being displaced to a position where light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from being incident on the sensor device, depending on a displacement position of the second displacement member. Game machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, the light emitting means is disposed on the second displacement member that is formed to be displaceable, so it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emitting means emits light at different positions as the second displacement member is displaced. . In this case, depending on the displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted to the sensor device. It is possible to prevent light from being received. As a result, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5 or A6, erroneous detection by the sensor device can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the case where a fixed member capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large amount of space is required for arranging such a member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, that space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor that are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and the sensor device emits light from either the first sensor or the second sensor. A game machine A8 characterized in that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor is configured to be able to receive light reflected by dirt on the transparent plate.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor that are arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and Since the first sensor or the second sensor is formed so that the other sensor can receive the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged in a position that is difficult to be seen by the player. At the same time, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate (for example, oil from the player's hands).

For example, in a configuration in which one sensor device is disposed at a position recessed in the width direction from the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated obliquely to the transparent plate, the sensor device is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the transparent plate, and to detect objects (for example, the player's hands and fingers) that are present on the front side of the transparent plate. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A8, for example, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions deeper in the width direction than the edges of the opening, respectively, across the opening of the game board. This makes it difficult for players to see it. In this case, if the light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor is reflected by dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor, and the dirt on the transparent plate is reflected. If there is no light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor, the light is transmitted through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor. Thereby, the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate can be detected.

Note that it is preferable that the detection of the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate by the first sensor and the second sensor is performed in a process when the gaming machine is powered on. When the gaming machine is powered on, there are no players in the store, so there is no need to distinguish between objects on the front side of the transparent plate (player's hands and fingers) and dirt on the transparent plate. This is because the accuracy of detecting the presence or absence of dirt can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is characterized in that an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light is disposed on a surface of the displacement member that is irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Game machine A9.

According to gaming machine A9, in any of gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Therefore, the light reflected by the displacement member can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. This makes it unnecessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of objects can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified and the control burden can be suppressed.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, a portion of the displacement member that is irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device is formed from a material that can transmit the irradiated light. Machine A10.

According to gaming machine A10, in any of gaming machines A1 to A9, the portion of the displacement member that is irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device is formed of a material that can transmit the irradiated light. , it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. This makes it unnecessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of objects can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified and the control burden can be suppressed.

In addition, by forming the above-mentioned portion of the displacement member from a material that can transmit the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be transmitted to the object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate light, the light reflected by an object can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. Thereby, the displacement member can be displaced while securing the detection area of the sensor device.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member has a reflective surface formed on a surface irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device to reflect the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device. A gaming machine A11 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member has a reflection member that reflects the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device on a surface that is irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device. Since the surface is formed, the light reflected by the displacement member can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. This makes it unnecessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of objects can be improved, and the judgment process can be simplified and the control burden can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the central floating unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a displaceable member formed to be displaceable, a first member disposed to be displaceable relative to the displaceable member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displaceable member, the displaceable member , a game machine B1 comprising a pair of arm members that are movable independently of each other, and the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively movable.

Here, it is known that a movable displacement member is provided and effects are produced by the displacement of the displacement member. Furthermore, there is also a device that further provides a first member on the front side of the displacement member and rotates the first member to enhance the presentation effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-105873). However, in the above-described structure, the first member rotates while the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and there is a problem in that the movement of the first member does not change easily.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member includes a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member at one end of the pair of arm members is connected, so that the pair of arm members can be connected to each other. By displacing them independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be varied.

Moreover, since the displacement member is connected to the arm member so as to be relatively displaceable, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is displaced relative to the arm member, and both are displaced independently, or when the arm member stops displacement, the first member is continued to be displaced. As a result, the movement of the first member can be varied.

In addition, the form of displacement of the arm member includes, for example, a form in which the arm member rotates around the other end, a form in which the other end undergoes sliding displacement, and a form in which these are combined (one arm member rotates and the other slides). , respectively) are exemplified.

Further, as a form in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, a shaft disposed in one of the arm member or the first member is inserted into a shaft hole disposed in the other. A configuration in which the supported shaft can be relatively displaced by rotating with respect to the shaft hole, and a pin disposed on one of the arm member or the first member slides along a sliding groove disposed on the other. A form in which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member and the elastic member is elastically deformed to allow relative displacement, and a form in which the arm member and the first member are disposed on either the arm member or the first member A configuration in which a spherical ball is disposed on the other side and can be relatively displaced by rotating in an arbitrary direction with respect to a stud that makes spherical contact with the ball; Examples include a form in which the nodes are connected via a joint (a mechanism in which nodes are movable parts) and can be relatively displaced by deformation of the link mechanism, and a form in which these forms are combined.

In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and are driven by a driving force applied from the driving means. A game machine B2 that is rotated about the other end.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the other end on the opposite side, and is driven. Since the arm members are rotated about the other end by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to impart a movement that combines linear movement and rotational movement to the first member, and it is possible to change the movement.

Note that the distances from one end to the other end of the pair of arm members may be set to be the same length, or may be set to different lengths.

In the game machine B1 or B2, one of the arm member or the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is disposed, and the sliding groove is arranged such that one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion are connected at least in a state in which the arm member is placed at a reference position. A gaming machine B3 is characterized in that a gap is formed between the gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin part, and the sliding groove allows at least the arm member to be in the reference position. In the arranged state, a gap is formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin part, so even if the arm member is stopped, the first member is moved by the gap. It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. Thereby, it is possible to change the movement of the first member.

For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at the reference position, the inertia force generated due to the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin part is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. can create a reciprocating displacement. As a result, after stopping the displacement of the arm member, the first member can be reciprocated (swinged).

In the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and a pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel to each other.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, since the sliding groove is formed in the first member and the pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel, the displacement of the arm member is prevented. After stopping at the reference position, when the first member is displaced relative to the arm member by the gap between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin part, A rotational component can be added to the relative displacement. Thereby, it is possible to change the movement of the first member.

Furthermore, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin part can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, thereby stabilizing the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member. At the same time, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

A gaming machine B5 in the gaming machine B4, wherein the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially V-shape.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, since the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially V-shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member has converged and stopped, the stopped state is maintained. The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the first member retracted to the retracted position from shaking due to disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the arm members are rotatably supported by a driving force applied from the driving means. The arm member is rotated about the other end, the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and is disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member. Game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the other end on the opposite side, and is driven. Since the arm members are rotated about the other end by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to impart a movement that combines linear movement and rotational movement to the first member, and it is possible to change the movement.

In this case, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove ( (inclination direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially V-shape or in a straight line. As a result, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocated by the action of inertia force, if the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially V-shape, the first member While it is possible to impart a rotational component to the movement, the reciprocating movement can be quickly converged toward the center of the square, and when the sliding grooves are arranged in a straight line, the first member The movement can be made into a linear component only.

Furthermore, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin part can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, thereby stabilizing the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member. At the same time, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B6, a gap formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion allows movement of the first member due to the action of gravity. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that it is arranged in a direction in which

According to game machine B7, in any of game machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin part is caused by the action of gravity to cause the first member to Since the first member is arranged in a direction that allows the movement of the first member, in addition to the movement that is followed by the displacement of the arm member, the first member can also form a movement that is not followed by the displacement of the arm member and is free falling due to the action of gravity. . Thereby, it is possible to change the movement of the first member.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body to which one end of the arm member is connected, a driven part displaceably disposed on the main body, and a driven part. A gaming machine B8 characterized by comprising a second driving means for applying driving force.

According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body to which one end of the arm member is connected, a driven part displaceably disposed on the main body, Since the second driving means for applying a driving force to the driven part is provided, it is possible to perform an effect in which the driven part is relatively displaced with respect to the main body part by the driving force of the second driving means. In this case, since a reaction force is applied to the main body due to the displacement of the driven part, the reaction force can create a displacement that causes the pin part to reciprocate toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. can. As a result, the main body (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocated) in a state where the arm member is stopped from being displaced.

In the game machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part, and is rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part and rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means, so that the arm In a state where the displacement of the member is stopped, when the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body to displace the main body, it is possible to easily generate a rotational component in the movement of the main body.

Examples of the shape of the driven portion include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and an elongated shape. In this case, the center of gravity of the driven part may be eccentric from the center of rotation (the position where it is pivotally supported by the main body part). Thereby, it is possible to increase the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive section, and to increase the fluctuation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle, thereby making it possible to change the movement of the main body section.

A gaming machine B10 in the gaming machine B9, wherein the rotation center of the driven part is located between the pair of pin parts.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B9, since the rotation center of the driven part is located between the pair of pin parts, the reaction force caused by the rotation of the drive part is absorbed by the rotation of the main body part. It can be easily connected to movement.

A game machine B11, which is any one of the game machines B1 to B10, and includes a second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the first member.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines B1 to B10, it is provided with a second displacement member that is formed to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so that it can come into contact with the first member. Such contact makes it possible to both restrict the movement of the first member and change the movement of the first member. For example, when stopping the arm member at the reference position, by bringing the second displacement member into contact with the first member, the first member is displaced (reciprocated) by the inertia force generated as the arm member stops. can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, when the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member and the first member is thrown off, thereby displacing the first member relative to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced or a mode in which the first member is displaced while being integrated with the second displacement member.

Furthermore, when the first member includes a main body and a driven part, by keeping the second displacement member in contact with the main body, only the driven part can be displaced while the main body remains in a stopped state. can be done. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the main body section is displaced together with the driven section by the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven section, and a mode in which only the driven section is displaced.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B11 includes a second displacement member formed to be displaceable, a magnet is disposed on one of the first member or the second displacement member, and a magnet is disposed on one of the first member or the second displacement member. A magnet or iron member is disposed on the other of the two displacement members, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or iron member. A game machine B12 characterized in that:

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B11, a second displacement member formed to be displaceable is provided, and one of the first member and the second displacement member is disposed. Since a magnetic force is exerted between the magnet and a magnet or iron member disposed on the other of the first member or the second displacement member, the movement of the first member is restricted by the action of the magnetic force, or The first member can be displaced. For example, by moving the second displacement member close to and away from the first member after the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member can be displaced (reciprocated) by the action of magnetic force. Note that since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other, and the two can be kept out of contact, so that damage can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. A driving means, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces. In a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize a graphic of a first rotating body and a graphic of a second rotating body, the transmitting means is configured to communicate between a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the driving force is different.

Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body each having a plurality of figures drawn on its outer peripheral surface are provided, and by rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of a second rotary body and a graphic drawn on the outer circumferential surface of a second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotating body is independently rotationally driven by the first drive motor (driving means), and the second rotating body is rotationally driven by the second drive motor, and the figure of the first rotating body that is visually recognized by the player is The combination of the figure of the second rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine requires the same number of drive motors as the number of rotating bodies, so there is a problem in that the cost increases accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the driving force of the driving means to the first rotary body and the second rotary body so that the rotational state of the first rotary body and the rotational state of the second rotary body are different. Since the driving means is configured to be transmittable to the player, even with one driving means, the combination of the graphics of the first rotating body and the graphics of the second rotating body that are visually recognized by the player can be changed. That is, the required number of driving means can be reduced, and costs can be reduced accordingly.

Note that the different rotational states of one rotating body and the other rotating body include, for example, a state where one rotating body and the other rotating body have different rotational speeds, and a state where one rotating body is rotated and the other rotating body is rotated while the other rotating body is rotated. A state in which the rotating body is stopped is exemplified. The rotation speed does not need to be constant and may be increased or decreased.

Examples of the plurality of figures drawn on the outer circumferential surface of each rotating body include letters, designs, colors, patterns, or a combination thereof. In this case, the figure may be a part of the character or design (combined with other shapes to form a single character or design), or the whole figure (the shape alone forms a single character or design). It may be a thing).

A game machine C2 in the game machine C1, wherein the transmission means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the first rotary body and the second rotary body at different rotation ratios.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, so that the rotation of the first rotating body is The rotation period and the rotation period of the second rotating body can be made different. Therefore, even with one driving means, it is possible to change the combination of the graphics of the first rotating body and the graphics of the second rotating body that are visually recognized by the player.

Moreover, since the transmission means is configured to vary the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the drive means to the first rotary body and the second rotary body, the structure of the transmission means can be simplified.

Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism that transmits rotation through meshing (a gear transmission mechanism or a chain transmission mechanism) or a mechanism that transmits rotation through friction (a friction transmission mechanism or a belt transmission mechanism). Gear transmission mechanisms include spur gears, worm and worm gears, bevel gears, or rack and pinion; chain transmission mechanisms include chains and sprockets; friction transmission mechanisms include friction gears; belt transmission mechanisms include , a pulley and a belt, respectively.

In this case, a mechanism for transmitting rotation through the above-mentioned engagement between the rotation shaft of the first rotation body and the drive shaft of the drive means, and between the rotation shaft of the second rotation body and the drive shaft of the drive means, respectively. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has its rotating shaft directly connected to the drive shaft of the driving means, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are directly connected to the drive shaft of the driving means. The mechanism for transmitting rotation through meshing or the mechanism for transmitting rotation through friction may be disposed between the other rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the drive means. In the latter case, the number of parts (such as gears) for configuring the mechanism for transmitting rotation can be suppressed, and costs can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine C2, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are in a state where the phase of one of them is shifted from the phase of the other at a viewing position where the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface is visible to the player. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is stopped at.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear, and it is also possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that are required to make a desired combination of figures appear. It can be made to appear in a short time by suppressing the rotation speed.

In other words, when the first and second rotating bodies are stopped at a viewing position where the player can visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface, if the phases of the two rotating bodies are required to match, the combination As the number of possible shapes decreases, the number of rotations required to reveal the desired combination of shapes increases (the table becomes longer). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visible position, the phase of one of the two rotating bodies is shifted from the phase of the other. Therefore, the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear can be increased, and the number of rotations required to make a desired combination of figures can be suppressed to make them appear in a short time. can.

In this case, at least part or all of the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are curved into an outwardly convex arc in a cross-sectional view perpendicular to the rotation axis. is preferred. This is because even if there is a phase shift between the first rotating body and the second rotating body that are stopped at the visible position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

In the gaming machine C1, the transmission means includes a first transmission means that transmits the rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body, and a second transmission means that transmits the rotation of the drive means to the second rotary body. and at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears is meshed with the other gear. A game machine C4 characterized in that it comprises a meshing region where the rotation is transmitted by the gear and a non-meshing region where the transmission of the rotation is cut off by making the meshing with the other gear into a non-meshing region.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, there are provided a first transmission means that transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and a second transmission means that transmits the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means includes at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshing region that meshes with the other gear to transmit rotation, and a meshing region of the other gear that meshes with the other gear to transmit rotation. Since it is provided with a non-meshing region where the meshing with the gear is non-meshing and blocks the transmission of rotation, there is a state in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped while the other rotates, and a state in which the other rotates while the first rotating body is stopped. A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even with one driving means, it is possible to change the combination of the graphics of the first rotating body and the graphics of the second rotating body that are visually recognized by the player.

Further, in this way, the transmission means can stop the rotation of one of the first rotary body and the second rotary body while rotating the other, and can also cancel the stop and restart the rotation of the first rotary body. It is possible to increase the expectations of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body.

Note that both the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshing region and a non-meshing region. It may also be provided with the following. As a result, a state in which both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state in which both stop, a state in which one stops and the other rotates, and a state in which one rotates and the other stops can be formed. .

In the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-meshing region, and the formation range of the non-meshing region is limited to the first rotating body or the second transmission means. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the settings are set corresponding to the intervals between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C4, only one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a gear having a meshing region and a non-meshing region, so that the driving means is not driven. In this state, one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is switched between rotating and stopping, and the other is maintained rotating. In this case, the formation range of the non-meshing region is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other of the first rotating body or the second rotating body, so that The length of the table whose element is a combination with the figure of the second rotating body can be shortened. Therefore, the number of rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to make a desired combination of figures appear can be suppressed. That is, the time required to create a desired combination of figures can be shortened.

Note that the formation range of the non-meshing region is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other means that one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is formed by the non-meshing region. This means that while the other is stopped, the other is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1). In particular, it is preferable to set n=1. This is because the length of the above-mentioned table can be made as short as possible, and the number of rotations required to make a desired combination of figures appear can be minimized.

In any of gaming machines C2 to C5, the transmission means includes a forward direction transmission means for transmitting the forward rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body; reverse direction transmission means for transmitting the rotation in the opposite direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body; Allows transmission to the direction transmission means, blocks transmission to the reverse direction transmission means, and prevents transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it is provided with a switching means for blocking the transmission and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means.

According to the game machine C6, in the effect produced by any of the game machines C2 to C5, when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the switching means prevents the rotation of the drive means from being transmitted to the forward direction transmission means. If it is allowed and the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is cut off, and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means is cut off by the switching means. Since the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is also allowed, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation seen by the player are different when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction and when it is rotated in the opposite direction. The types of combinations with the body shapes can be made different. That is, there are two types of tables whose elements are combinations of the figures of the first rotating body and the figures of the second rotating body, and by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, it is possible to arbitrarily select one of these two types of tables. can do.

In addition, as the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the first structure (a structure in which the rotation ratio of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different) explained in the gaming machine C2 or C3, the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which either the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped by the non-meshing region), and the second structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated synchronously at the same speed. Any one of the three structures can be selected.

For example, a case is exemplified in which the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means. For example, a case in which the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and a case in which the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means is exemplified. In the former case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have different rotation ratios, and in the latter case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have a meshing region and a non-meshing region. The formation ratio of is made different. With this, there are two types of tables whose elements are the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body, and by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, these two types of tables can be arbitrarily selected. It can be made possible.

Further, the rotational direction of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotational direction of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the driving means is rotated in the opposite direction. may be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, it is preferable that they be in the same direction. This is because by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed.

Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and an outer periphery of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that at least a part of the surface is formed from a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine C7, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed from a light-transmitting material. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

Note that the light emitting means may emit light all the time or may emit light under predetermined conditions. The predetermined conditions include, for example, when the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body form a specific combination, or when either the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped, the stoppage occurs. An example is when the rotation is restarted before the rotation is executed or after the rotation is stopped.

The gaming machine C7 is formed into a box shape with an open front surface, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are housed therein, and the outer circumferential surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are exposed through the open part of the front surface. A gaming machine C8 is characterized in that it is provided with a container that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the figure.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, it is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the first rotating body is rotated through the open part of the front. Since the player is provided with a container that allows the player to visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the body and the second rotating body, the player can use the container to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from that in the case where the light emission is directly recognized. For example, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the inner wall surface of the container so that the player can see it, and the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall of the container and irradiated onto a predetermined object. Examples include a mode in which the player is made to see the object along with a predetermined object, and a mode in which light emitted from a light emitting means is made to enter the wall of the container to cause a predetermined portion of the container (for example, the front end surface) to emit light. Ru.

Note that in each of the above aspects, for example, a specific figure among a plurality of figures drawn on at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is on the back side of the first rotating body or the second rotating body (i.e., It is preferable to execute this when the player is placed in a position that is not visible to the player. When the light emitting means emits light, the player is reminded of a specific figure placed in a position that is invisible to the player (the first rotating body or the second rotating body is moved so that the specific figure becomes visible). This is because it can make people expect it to be rotated. In particular, it is preferable that the light emitting means emit light while at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped.

In the gaming machines C1 to C8, a storage body in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are housed, and a presentation position and a game where the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be seen by the player. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that it is provided with a moving means for moving the gaming machine to and from a retracted position that is invisible to a person.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged so that the first rotating body and the second rotating body are Since it is provided with a moving means for moving between a production position that is visible from the player and a retreat position that is invisible to the player, a desired combination of the shapes of the first rotating body and the figures of the second rotating body can be selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the required timing.

That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body relatively many times in order to bring out the desired combination, which takes time. Since the player's body can be moved to a retracted position that is invisible to the player, the first rotary body and the second rotary body can be rotated to predetermined rotational positions in advance at the retracted position. When the necessary timing arrives, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be moved to the presentation position by the moving means, and a desired combination can be quickly revealed.

The gaming machine C9 is provided with operating means for executing a predetermined operation, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the operating means is operated when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are placed in the retracted position. Characteristic gaming machine C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C9, the first rotation body and the second rotation body are rotated when they are placed in the retracted position and the operating means is operated. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance at the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the rotation from being recognized by the player.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a relatively loud sound is generated, so even if the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the retracted position and are no longer visible to the player, the first rotating body and the second rotating body There is a possibility that the rotation of the second rotating body will be recognized by the player due to the sound generated by the rotation. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be performed by blending it into the operation of the operating means, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize such rotation. can.

Note that, as the operating means, for example, a payout device, a sound generation device, etc. are exemplified. That is, when the payout device is dispensing game media, a relatively loud sound is generated in conjunction with the payout operation of the game media. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like. The same applies to the state where the sound is being generated from the sound generating device. Alternatively, or in addition to this, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated when a predetermined display is being displayed on the display device. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like.

<About the concept of the invention using LED 344 as an example>
a rotating body on which a plurality of figures are drawn on an outer circumferential surface and at least a portion of an outer wall forming the outer circumferential surface is made of a light-transmitting material; a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body; In a gaming machine, the housing body is rotatably housed and allows a player to visually see a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body through an open portion on the front surface, and the housing body is configured to emit light from the light emitting means and to cause the rotating body to emit light from the light emitting means. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that light transmitted through the outer wall is reflected by the container and visually recognized by the player.

Here, a rotating body on which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer circumferential surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer circumferential surface is made of a light-transmitting material; and a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body; A gaming machine is known that includes a container in which a rotating body is rotatably housed, and allows a player to view a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body from an open front part of the container (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-20133) -220215 Publication). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the light from the light emitting means is only directly visible to the player through the outer wall of the rotating body that is visible from the open front part of the housing. There was a problem in that the lighting effect was not effectively exhibited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the housing and visually recognized by the player, so that the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is It is possible to make the light visible to the player in a manner different from the case where the light is seen directly, and as a result, the effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body includes a transmitting part formed of a light-transmitting material and transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a transmitting part formed of a material capable of reflecting light. and a reflecting part that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means into the interior of the rotating body, and when the rotating body rotates, the transmitting part and the reflecting part reflect the irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it can be passed through.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body includes a transmitting part that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a transmitting part that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body. A reflecting part is formed to reflect the light into the interior of the rotating body, and when the rotating body rotates, the transmitting part and the reflecting part can pass through the irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is It is possible to form a form in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmitting part to the outside, and a form in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting part and then transmitted from the transmitting part to the outside. It can be switched according to the rotation of. In other words, two light emitting forms can be formed using only one light emitting means, and for example, the position of the light visible to the player can be switched to at least two locations without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of light.

In the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a posture to radiate light toward the open portion of the front surface of the housing.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a position to irradiate light toward the open part of the front surface of the container, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is In the mode in which the light is transmitted directly to the outside from the transparent part, the player can see the light from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located in the open part on the front of the housing, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected. In the configuration in which the light is reflected at the inner wall of the container and then transmitted to the outside through the transmitting section, the light is not visible from the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body located in the open front part of the container, and the light reflected from the inner wall of the container is transmitted to the outside. The player can visually recognize the area around the rotating body. As a result, the position where the light is visible can be changed as the rotating body rotates, and the position where the light is visible can be greatly different. As a result, the effect of the light can be effectively exhibited. can.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, since the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body with a polygonal cross section, the apparent appearance of the rotating body changes as the rotating body rotates. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted to the outside from the transmission part, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the housing is made visible to the player around the rotating body, the light is The size of the visible area can be increased or decreased as the rotating body rotates, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body, and each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body A gaming machine D5 characterized in that it is formed as a substantially triangular prism-like body having a substantially triangular cross section.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body Since the rotating body and the second rotating body are each formed as a triangular prism with a triangular cross section, as the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body ( (opposing distance) can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting part and then transmitted to the outside from the transmitting part, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is transmitted through the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When the player makes the light visible, the size of the area where the light is visible can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the game machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the reflecting portion disposed on an inner surface of an outer wall forming one of the outer surfaces of the substantially triangular cross section. A game machine D6 characterized in that the transparent portions are provided on each of the outer walls forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has an inner surface of an outer wall that forms one of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. Since a reflective part is provided and a transmitting part is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflective part and then transmitted from the transmitting part to the outside. In this case, light can be transmitted to the outside from two outer surfaces (transmitting parts). Therefore,
The light can be reflected at two different places on the inner wall surface of the container and made visible to the player, or the light transmitted from one transparent part can be directly seen by the player, while the light transmitted from the other transparent part can be seen directly by the player. The light can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the container and visible to the player, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine D6, the storage body is formed into a box-like body with an open front surface, and a reflective part made of a material capable of reflecting light is provided on the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body, and the first reflective part is formed from a material capable of reflecting light. A gaming machine D7 characterized in that it is disposed in a range exceeding the outer dimensions of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the housing is formed into a box-like body with an open front, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is made of a material that can reflect light. Since the reflective part to be formed is disposed in a range exceeding the outer dimensions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflective part and then transmitted from the transmitting part to the outside. The light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body is made visible to the player in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine D7, the housing is an inner wall surface on a side surface of the box-shaped body, and is capable of reflecting light onto an inner wall surface facing parallel to the rotation axis of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine D8 is characterized in that a reflective section made of a material of:

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D7, the housing is an inner wall surface on the side surface of the box-like body, and faces parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Since a reflective part made of a material capable of reflecting light is provided on the inner wall surface, the light reflected on the inner wall surface on the back side of the container is further reflected on the inner wall surface on the side side, so that it can be seen by the player. At the same time, the light transmitted from the transmitting part can be reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface of the container and can be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

<About the concept of the invention using the first rotating body 10340 as an example>
a rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on its outer circumferential surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer circumferential surface being made of a light-transmitting material; a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body; and a rotating body. A gaming machine comprising: a housing body rotatably housing the rotary body and allowing a player to visually see a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotary body through an open portion on the front surface; A game machine E1 that houses rotating bodies, and one of the pair of rotating bodies has a rotation axis that intersects with the other rotating body.

Here, a rotating body on which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer circumferential surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer circumferential surface is made of a light-transmitting material; and a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body; A gaming machine is known that includes a container in which a rotating body is rotatably housed, and allows a player to view a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body from an open front part of the container (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-20133) (Refer to Publication No.-220215). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the presentation effect of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is not effectively exhibited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one pair of rotating bodies is housed in the housing, and the rotational axis of one of the pair of rotating bodies intersects with the other rotating body. Therefore, it is possible to provide a plurality of directions in which the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body moves, so that the presentation effect of the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body can be improved.

An example of a mode in which the pair of rotating bodies intersect is a case where the rotation axes of the pair of rotating bodies intersect at right angles. In this case, for example, if the container is formed into a rectangular box shape, the light emitted from the light emitting means of one rotor in the radial direction of the shaft will be angled at the side surface where the rotation shaft of one rotor is supported. Instead, only the light emitted from the light emitting means of the other rotating body is captured and is visible to the player. That is, it is possible to separate the surface of the accommodating body from which the light emitted from the light emitting means of one rotating body is reflected and the surface of the accommodating body from which the light emitted from the light emitting means of the other rotating body is reflected. can.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the housing and is visually recognized by the player.

According to the game machine E2, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the housing and visible to the player, so that the light is emitted directly from the open part of the front surface of the rotating body. It is possible to make the light visible to the player in a manner different from the case where the light is visually recognized, and also, among the side surfaces of the container, not only the side facing the outer peripheral surface of one of the rotating bodies but also the side supporting one of the rotating bodies. It can be used as a part that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means of the rotating body. Thereby, it is possible to increase the number of locations where the light emitted from the light emitting means is visually recognized inside the container, and it is possible to make the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body brightly visible. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the length of the one rotating body in the axial direction is longer than the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the one rotating body and the other rotating body have the same length in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body is reflected on a portion of the inner surface of the housing body that faces the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body. It is characterized by comprising a mirror-like reflecting member, and the length of the reflecting member and the other rotating body that are visually recognized together is equal to that of the one rotating body in the axial direction of the one rotating body. A gaming machine E3.

Here, when a pair of rotating bodies are housed in a container in such a manner that their rotational axes intersect at right angles, the length of one rotating body in the direction of the rotational axis and the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis can be matched. , the widths of the pair of rotating bodies (the dimension along the axial direction of one of the rotating bodies) can be matched. However, for example, if the length of one rotating body in the axial direction is longer than the length in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis is longer than the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis. Because of the length, the other rotating body protrudes more than the one rotating body in the axial radial direction, resulting in a problem that the housing becomes larger.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the length of one rotating body in the axial direction is longer than the length of the other rotating body in the axially perpendicular direction. In the case where one rotating body and the other rotating body have the same length in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the dimension in the radial direction of the axis of the other rotating body is the dimension in the radial direction of the axis of one rotating body. The size of the container can be suppressed. Furthermore, a mirror-like reflecting member that reflects the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body is disposed on a portion of the inner surface of the container that faces the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body, and the reflecting member Since the visible length of the two rotating bodies together is the same as that of one rotating body in the axial direction of the other rotating body, the break between the pair of rotating bodies can be made less noticeable.

In this case, the part of the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body that is reflected on the reflective member, which cannot be seen directly from the front, is the part of the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of one rotating body. By being visually recognized as one with the front facing part of the container, it is possible to create a presentation that does not feel out of place. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

Additionally, in this case, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body, which is visible through the reflective members placed on the left and right sides of the other rotating body, appears to be rotating as the other rotating body rotates. Therefore, it can be visually recognized as if another rotating body is connected to the left and right sides of the other rotating body.

In the gaming machine E3, the reflecting member includes a pair of side reflecting members disposed on a pair of side walls facing the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body with respect to the other rotating body; A gaming machine E4 characterized in that a boundary between the side reflecting members is formed on the back side of the other rotating body, and the boundary is invisible to the player.

Here, when the reflecting member is formed from a plurality of mirrors that are successively arranged around the other rotating body at predetermined angular intervals, the figure that is visually recognized through the mirrors is It is visually recognized as being cut at the boundary between adjacent mirrors. Therefore, it may feel strange when a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body that is visible through the reflective member and a figure that is drawn on the outer circumferential surface of one rotating body and that is directly visible to the player are viewed at the same time. growing.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member is arranged on the side of the pair of side walls facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body. The border between the pair of side reflecting members is formed on the back side of the other rotating body, and the border is invisible to the player, so that the player cannot see the border between the pair of side reflecting members. It is possible to prevent the visually recognized figure from being cut off at the boundary between the side reflecting members. As a result, the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body can be made visible as a single plate figure on the entire surface of the side reflection member, and the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the one rotating body can be seen by the player. It is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when the image is viewed at the same time as a figure that is directly visible. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

In the gaming machine E4, a partition plate that does not transmit visible light is disposed between the pair of rotating bodies to partition an internal space of the housing, and the partition plate is capable of rotating the other rotating body. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that the gaming machine E5 is provided with a support section that supports the partition plate, and an auxiliary support section that supports the partition plate.

Here, a partition plate may be disposed between the pair of rotating bodies in order to prevent figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of rotating bodies that are visually recognized through the reflective member from being mixed together. In terms of presentation, the narrower the interval between the pair of rotating bodies, the easier it is to produce a presentation effect by making the pair of rotating bodies visible as one, and it is preferable that the partition plate be made thin. On the other hand, the partition plate can also pivotally support the rotating body. In this case, it is preferable for the partition plate to be thick in terms of strength. As described above, there are conflicting problems when setting the thickness of the partition plate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the partition plate is supported by the auxiliary support portion, so that the rigidity of the partition plate can be improved. Thereby, the thickness of the partition plate can be suppressed while maintaining the strength to use the partition plate as a support member for the other rotating body, and the distance between the pair of rotating bodies can be narrowed. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

The auxiliary support part is not particularly limited, but a reflective member can be used. In other words, by forming the reflective member between the partition plate and the side surface of the container, the reflective member has the effect of reflecting pictures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of other rotating bodies and the rigidity of the partition plate. It can also be used to improve the effect. This eliminates the need for a separate member to improve the rigidity of the partition plate.

A gaming machine E6, which is any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the container is rotatable about an axis parallel to the rotational axis of at least one of the pair of rotating bodies.

Here, when one rotating body and the other rotating body are rotated in different rotational states, when one rotating body and the other rotating body are stopped, the phases of the two rotating bodies match. If this is required, the number of shapes that can be combined will decrease, and the number of rotations required to create the desired combination of shapes will increase (the table will become longer).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the housing can rotate around an axis parallel to the rotational axis of at least one of the pair of rotating bodies. Therefore, when at least one of the pair of rotating bodies tilts at a predetermined angle with respect to the front surface of the container and stops, the container can be rotated in the opposite direction by the angle of inclination. , it is possible to absorb the phase shift when one of the rotating bodies is stopped, and it is possible to create a desired combination of figures with a small number of rotations.

In addition, since the housing body is formed to be rotatable, for example, by changing the angle in the direction of rotation of the other rotating body, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body changes and can be visually recognized. By attaching a lenticular or the like (a member whose visible figure can be changed depending on the angle formed with the line of sight) to the outer peripheral surface, it is possible to increase the number of visible figures when the rotating body is stopped.

In the gaming machine E6, a gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the rotating shaft of the storage body is arranged along the direction in which the pair of rotating bodies are arranged in series.

According to the gaming machine E7, since the rotation axis of the container is arranged along the direction in which the pair of rotating bodies are arranged in series, it is possible to easily suppress the rotation radius of the container.

In the gaming machine E7, a portion of the side wall of the storage body facing the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body is opened so that a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that a side opening portion is formed.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body is displayed on the side wall of the storage body in a portion facing the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body. Since the side opening portion is formed so as to be visible to the player, a performance can be performed using the side surface of the container which is invisible to the player before the container rotates.

When the container rotates and is viewed from the side, one of the rotating objects is in a position with its axis of rotation facing the player, making the outer circumferential surface invisible, so when determining the stopping position of the rotating object, In this case, it is sufficient to determine the stopping position using only the other rotating body. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of storage bodies are arranged side by side to form a series of patterns at the stop positions of a pair of rotary bodies housed in each body, the degree of freedom of the stop position of the rotary bodies (where on the rotary table can be used as a stopping position). Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

A gaming machine E9, which is any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, characterized in that the rotation axis of the storage body and the rotation axis of the other rotating body are formed coaxially.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, since the rotation axis of the storage body and the rotation axis of the other rotating body are formed coaxially, the inclination of the stop position can be adjusted by adjusting the inclination of the storage body. It is possible to suppress the discomfort felt by the player when canceling by rotating the .

For example, if the rotation axis of the storage body is shifted in the left-right direction from the rotation axis of the other rotation body, the center axis that the player had previously seen as the center axis of the rotation locus of the other rotation body and the rotation axis of the storage body The rotation causes the axis of movement of the other rotating body to deviate from the axis of movement of the other rotating body, making it easier for the player to feel that a rotation other than rotation about the rotational axis of the other rotating body has occurred in the other rotating body.

On the other hand, if the rotation axis of the other rotating body and the rotation axis of the accommodation body are coaxial, the rotation axis of the other rotating body due to the rotation of the accommodation body will also be used as the central axis of the rotation locus of the other rotating body until then. Since the central axis is the same as the one that the player was visually recognizing, the player can easily feel that the rotation caused by the rotation of the storage body is just a continuation of the rotation of the other rotating body. In other words, even after one rotating body has stopped, the player can feel that the other rotating body is just continuing to rotate, and when canceling the inclination of the stop position with the rotation of the storage body, the player can feel that the other rotating body is just continuing to rotate. It is possible to suppress the discomfort that people feel.

Any one of the gaming machines E6 to E9 includes a back side member and a connecting member that connects the back side member and the storage body, and the storage body rotates at one end in the direction of its own rotation axis. the connecting member connects an intermediate portion of the housing body in the direction of the rotation axis and the back side member, and the back side member extends along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the housing body. A game machine E10 characterized in that it is formed from a shape.

Here, when the container is pivotally supported at both ends in the direction of the rotation axis, a stopper for stopping the rotation of the container is placed near one of the shaft support positions, and when the rotation of the container is restricted by the stopper, , it is difficult to suppress the container from flowing due to inertia near the other axial position due to the length of the container in the rotation axis direction, and it is necessary to arrange stoppers at the pivot positions on both sides. . In this case, if the timing at which the container contacts the pair of stoppers is off, there is a risk that the container will vibrate at the stop position, and the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotor cannot be effectively exhibited. There was a problem with it disappearing. On the other hand, it is possible to pivotally support the container at the intermediate portion by inserting the pivot portion into the internal space of the container, but this has the problem of narrowing the installation area for the rotating body. Ta.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E6 to E9, the gaming machine E10 includes a back side member and a connecting member that connects the back side member and the accommodating body. , one end is pivotally supported, while the middle part is connected by a connecting member to the back side member formed in a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the container, so that the interior of the container is It is possible to narrow the distance between the pivot positions of the container while securing the space. This makes it possible to suppress the number of stoppers that stop the rotation of the container, thereby suppressing vibration of the container at the stop position. Therefore, the effects of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited.

In any of gaming machines E8 to E10, when the open portion of the container faces the front, the reflective member makes the side open portion invisible, and the side open portion of the container faces the front. The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that when the game machine E11 is facing the other rotating body, the other rotating body can be visually recognized through the side open portion of the gaming machine E11.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines E8 to E10, when the open part of the container faces the front, the side open part is made invisible by the reflective member, and the side of the container is When the side open part faces the front, the other rotating body can be seen through the side open part, so the side wall part of the container can be used to create an effect that allows the rotating body to be seen through the side open part, and to provide side reflection. It can be used both for the production of making the rotating body visible through the member.

Note that when the open part faces the front, the side open part is not visible, and when the side open part faces the front, the rotating body can be seen through the side open part. Examples include a mode in which the user moves left and right and retreats outside the range occupied by the side open portion, and a mode in which a one-way mirror is used.

In the gaming machine E11, the reflecting member includes a pair of side reflecting members disposed on a pair of side walls facing the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body with respect to the other rotating body, and The border of the side reflecting member is formed on the back side of the other rotating body when the open portion faces the front, and the border is invisible to the player and the side open portion faces the front. In the slide, the side reflecting member disposed on the side far from the side open portion of the pair of side reflecting members slides along the wall surface of the container as the container rotates. A game machine E12, characterized in that the game machine E12 is provided with a section, and changes its posture to a posture facing the front as the slide section slides.

Here, if the side reflecting member is arranged so that the boundary between the side reflecting members is not visible to the player on the back side of the other rotating body, when the side reflecting member is visually observed from the side open part, the other rotating body The reflective member is visible at different inclination angles on the left and right sides. As a result, the pattern appears asymmetrical, creating a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, when the reflective members are arranged in a symmetrical manner when viewed from the side (the reflective members extend along the front and back direction), the boundaries between the reflective members are noticeable and the effect of the shapes drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body is effective. It becomes difficult to perform effectively.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E12, the reflecting member includes a pair of side reflecting members disposed on a pair of side walls facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body. The boundary between the pair of side reflection members is formed on the back side of the other rotating body when the open part faces the front, so that it is invisible to the player, and when the side open part faces the front, Of the pair of side reflection members, the side reflection member disposed on the side far from the side open portion includes a slide portion that slides on the side wall of the container as the container rotates, and the slide portion As the slide moves, the posture changes to face the front.

Therefore, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E11, in the gaming machine E12, by making the boundary of the reflective member invisible when the open part faces the front, the production effect of the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is effective. By making the size of the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body the same on the left and right sides of the other rotating body, which is reflected on the reflective member when the side open part faces the front. , it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort felt by a player who visually recognizes the reflective member.

<Example of technical idea of providing two transmission paths FL1 and FL2>
A driving means, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces. In a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the transmitting means is configured such that the rotating state of the first rotating body and the rotating state of the second rotating body are different from each other. forward direction transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the drive means in the forward direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body; a reverse direction transmission means for transmitting data, and when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the rotation of the drive means is allowed to be transmitted to the forward direction transmission means, and the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is blocked. , and a switching means for cutting off transmission of the rotation of the driving means to the forward direction transmission means and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means when the driving means is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by the following.

Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body are provided with a plurality of figures drawn on the outer circumferential surface, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated so that the plurality of figures are drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body. A gaming machine is known that allows a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of a second rotating body and a graphic drawn on the outer circumferential surface of a second rotating body (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). However, the conventional gaming machine described above requires a driving means for each rotating body, which has the problem of increasing costs.

Therefore, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the applicant of the present application has developed a gaming machine that is equipped with a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of one driving means to a first rotating body and a second rotating body so that the respective rotational states are different. Developed (unknown at the time of filing). However, in this case, the performance by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is limited to two modes in which the first driving means is rotated in forward and reverse directions, and furthermore, these two modes reverse the time series of rotation. Therefore, there was a problem in that there was little change in the presentation by the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the presentation was simplified.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the transmission means transmits the forward rotation of the driving means to the first rotary body and the second rotary body so that the rotational state of the first rotary body and the rotational state of the second rotary body are different. 2. A forward direction transmission means that transmits the rotation to the rotating body, a reverse direction transmission means that transmits the rotation in the reverse direction opposite to the forward direction of the drive means to a predetermined member, and when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, Allows transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means, blocks transmission to the reverse direction transmission means, and when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, forward transmission of the rotation of the drive means Since the switch includes a switching means for blocking transmission to the means and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means, one driving means can transmit the driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body through two transmission paths. Or it can be transmitted to a predetermined member. This makes it possible to complicate the performance of the first rotating body and the second rotating body without increasing the number of driving means.

Note that the predetermined members include a lighting member disposed on the rotation axis of the rotating body, and a shield capable of forming a state in which the open part of the front surface of the container in which the rotating body is accommodated is covered and a state in which it is evacuated from the open part. Examples include a member, a thin plate member that is a member that is rotatable around the longitudinal direction, and that constitutes a wall surface of the container by being arranged in a row in the width direction. Further, the predetermined members may be the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

In the gaming machine F1, the predetermined member is formed of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and because the structures of the forward direction transmitting means and the reverse direction transmitting means are different, the predetermined member is A game machine F2 characterized in that the rotational states of the first rotary body and the second rotary body are different depending on whether the driving force is transmitted or when the driving force is transmitted from the reverse direction transmission means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the figure of the first rotating body and the first The types of combinations with the figures of the two rotating bodies can be made different.

In addition, as the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the first structure (a structure in which the rotation ratio of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different) explained in the gaming machine C2 or C3, the gaming machine C4 or The second structure explained in C5 (a structure in which either the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped by the non-meshing region), and the third structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated synchronously at the same speed. structure, and a fourth structure in which only either the first rotating body or the second rotating body is rotated.

For example, a case is exemplified in which the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means. For example, a case in which the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and a case in which the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means is exemplified. In the former case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have different rotation ratios, and in the latter case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have a meshing region and a non-meshing region. The formation ratio of is made different. With this, there are two types of tables whose elements are combinations of the figures of the first rotating body and the figures of the second rotating body, and by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, these two types of tables can be arbitrarily selected. It can be made possible.

Further, the rotational direction of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotational direction of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the driving means is rotated in the opposite direction. may be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, it is preferable that they be in the same direction. This is because by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed.

A game machine F1 or F2, wherein at least a part of the transmission means is formed to protrude inward from an axial end of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least a portion of the transmission means is formed by protruding inward from the axial end of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Therefore, in the axial direction of the rotor, the axial length of the rotor and at least a part of the length of the transmission means can be partially canceled, and the first rotor, the second rotor, and the transmission means are arranged. It is possible to reduce the space required for the rotation in the axial direction of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, one of the forward direction transmitting means and the reverse direction transmitting means is disposed at one end in the axial direction of the first rotary body and the second rotary body, and the forward direction transmitting means and A gaming machine F4, wherein the other of the reverse direction transmission means is disposed at the other axial end of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

Here, when the transmission means is formed in two ways, a forward direction transmission means and a reverse direction transmission means, if they are arranged at one end in the axial direction of the first rotary body and the second rotary body, the two ways are possible. A partition plate is required to separate the transmission means, which increases component costs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F2 or F3, one of the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means is arranged at one end in the axial direction of the first rotary body and the second rotary body. Since the other of the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means is arranged at the other axial end of the first rotation body and the second rotation body, the first rotation body and the second rotation body The body can be used as a member for partitioning the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, making it unnecessary to provide an additional partition plate.

The gaming machine F4 includes a container in which the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the transmission means are housed, and at least a part of a transmission path connecting the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means is provided. , a gaming machine F5 is formed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

Here, when the number of transmission paths of the transmission means increases, it becomes necessary to add a transmission shaft to transmit the driving force of the drive means to each transmission path, which compresses the empty space inside the container and makes the container larger. The need may arise.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the transmission means are provided with a housing body, and the forward direction transmission means or the reverse direction transmission means is provided. At least a part of the transmission path connecting the two is formed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is possible to suppress the space removed from being compressed by the transmission path, and the size of the container can be suppressed.

A gaming machine F6, characterized in that any one of the gaming machines F2 to F5 is provided with a stopping means for stopping the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is stopped. .

Here, in the case where the driving force is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, for example, when the driving force transmission by the forward direction transmission means is canceled, the reverse direction If the transmission path of the transmission means is in a slipping state (for example, the gears are not meshed), the first rotating body and the second rotating body are not stopped, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are There was a problem in that it hindered operation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F6, any of the gaming machines F2 to F5 includes a stopping means that stops the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is stopped. Therefore, regardless of the state of the forward direction transmission means or the reverse direction transmission means when the driving means is stopped, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be stopped by stopping the driving means, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be stopped by stopping the driving means. It is possible to improve the operation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

The gaming machine F1 includes a light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and emitting light in a radial direction of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and , at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the predetermined member is formed from the light emitting means. F7.

Here, after stopping the first rotating body and the second rotating body, until the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated again, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are caused to change. Therefore, the first rotating body and the second rotating body could not be fully utilized as a performance part.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is disposed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. a light emitting means that emits light in a radial direction of the rotor, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the predetermined member is formed from the light emitting means. Therefore, by rotating the driving means in the opposite direction, the state of the light emitting means can be changed. As a result, after the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped and until the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated again, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are sufficiently used as a production part. It can be used for

Note that the state of the light emitting means changes by rotating a rotating body that includes a part that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means and a part that blocks the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that the player can visually see the light emitted from the light emitting means. Examples include a mode of switching between a possible state and an invisible state, and a mode of changing the emission direction of light that is visible through the rotating body when viewed from the front by rotating the light emitting means around the axis of the rotating body. .

A gaming machine F7 includes a shaft member disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and configured to be capable of transmitting a driving force from the driving means, and the shaft member. urging means for urging in a direction to maintain a predetermined posture, the light emitting means is disposed on the shaft member, and the reverse direction transmission means is in a transmission state for transmitting a driving force to the shaft member. , and a non-transmission state in which transmission of driving force to the shaft member is cut off.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects of the game machine F7, the first rotary body and the second rotary body are arranged coaxially with the rotation axis of at least one of the second rotary body, a light emitting means is disposed, and a driving means is provided. A shaft member formed to be capable of transmitting a driving force, and a biasing means for biasing the shaft member in a direction to maintain the shaft member in a predetermined posture, and the reverse direction transmission means transmits the driving force to the shaft member. Since a transmission state and a non-transmission state in which transmission of the driving force to the shaft member is cut off are formed, the light emitting means can be rocked by transmitting the driving force in only one direction (reverse direction). Therefore, the performance of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be complicated.

In the gaming machine F1, a shielding state in which the front surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are covered to make the first rotating body and the second rotating body invisible; A shielding member that is retracted from the front surface of the two rotating bodies to form a retracted state in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are visible, and an urging force that generates a biasing force that biases the shielding member in one direction. and a locking member configured to lock the shielding member in the shielded state, wherein the predetermined member is formed from the shielding member, and the driving force of the drive means is transmitted by the reverse direction transmission means. is transmitted to the shielding member, so that the shielding member is moved toward the shielding state, and a biasing force of the biasing means is generated in a direction to move the shielding member toward the retracted state. A game machine F9 featuring the following.

Here, by forming the shielding member that makes the first rotating body and the second rotating body invisible, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be kept rotating in the shielded state, and the shielding member can be kept rotating. Although it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotary body and the second rotary body required to reveal a desired combination of figures after the retracted state, a driving means for driving the shielding member is additionally required. There was a problem with that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, since the predetermined member is formed of a shielding member, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the shielding member by the reverse direction transmission means. Since the shielding member can be moved in one direction (direction toward the shielding state), an additional drive means for driving the shielding member can be eliminated. Further, the locking member allows the shielding member to be locked in the shielded state, and by releasing the locking by the locking member, the shielding member can be moved toward the retracted state by the biasing force. The first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated while maintaining the members in a shielded state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to reveal a desired combination of figures after the shielding member is in the retracted state while suppressing the number of driving means. I can do it.

In the game machine F9, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the locking member via the shielding member, so that the state of the locking member is changed to a locked state in which the shielding member is locked in the shielding state. and a release state in which the lock is released.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F9, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the locking member via the shielding member, so that the state of the locking member changes to the shielding state. Since it can be switched between a locked state in which the lock is locked and a release state in which the lock is released, there is no need for an additional member to change the state of the locking member, and there is no need for shielding when changing the state of the locking member. A detection device for detecting the position of the member can be eliminated. Therefore, the shielding member can be locked and unlocked while suppressing the addition of members.

A gaming machine F11 in the gaming machine F9 or F10, wherein the shielding member shields at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body from visibility in the shielding state.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F9 or F10, the shielding member, in the shielding state, shields at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body from being visible, and the other Even if the rotating body is visible, the relationship between the rotational states of the first rotating body and the second rotating body cannot be grasped, so when both the first rotating body and the second rotating body are shielded. The same effect can be achieved. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement position of the shielding member in the shielding state can be increased.

The gaming machine F1 includes a plurality of plate members arranged in series on the back side of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the surfaces of the plurality of plate members face forward, The rear part of the plate member is rendered invisible by a shielding state in which the rear part of the plate member is hidden from view, and the normal line of the surface of the plurality of plate members is oriented in a direction parallel to the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine F12, wherein the predetermined member is formed from the plurality of plate members.

Here, the first rotating body and an effect in which the rotational movement of the second rotating body and the surface of the plate member itself are visible together, and the rotational movement of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the rear part of the plate member are visible together. However, there is a problem in that an additional driving means for rotating the plate member is required.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, since the predetermined device is formed from a plurality of plate members, the driving force for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body is generated. The plate member can be rotated using the driving force of the driving means. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the state of the portions of the first rotary body and the second rotary body that are visually recognized at the rear while suppressing the number of driving means.

In the gaming machine F12, the surface of the plate member is formed to be able to reflect light, and the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member are located at protruding positions formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device. and a retracted position, which is a position moved outward of the liquid crystal display device from the extended position, and at least the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member are moved to the retracted position. A game machine F13 characterized in that the surface of the plate member is formed to be tiltable toward the center front of the game area when the plate member is placed in the desired position.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F12, the surface of the plate member is formed to be able to reflect light, and the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member can be moved between the extended position and the retracted position. When the plate member is moved between the two sides and is placed at least in the retracted position, the surface of the plate member can be tilted toward the center of the play area. The surface of the board faces the front and reflects the light to the front, thereby reflecting the light toward the player. On the other hand, when the board member is placed in the retracted position, the surface of the board member faces toward the center of the gaming area. It can be tilted to reflect light toward the player. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member, the light reflected by the plate member can be directed toward the player.

Methods for transmitting driving force between multiple plate members include forming a gear at the tip of each plate member and meshing them with each other, and forming a gear at the tip of each plate member and meshing them with a rack gear. Illustrated.

<Example of technical idea using shape changing member RK12>
A driving means, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces. In a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize a graphic of a first rotating body and a graphic of a second rotating body, the first rotating body and the second rotating body have a rotation direction on an outer peripheral surface in which they are visually recognized. A game machine G1 characterized by comprising a figure changing member that changes a figure that is visually recognized according to the angle of the figure.

Here, a driving means, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, a first rotating body which is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmission means, and has a plurality of figures drawn on its outer peripheral surface; Two rotating bodies are provided, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, and a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body and a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the second rotating body are respectively played in a game. A gaming machine that allows a person to visually recognize the game is known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the combinations of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are limited to the shapes that can be visually recognized by the player when the rotating body is stopped. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided with a figure changing member on the outer peripheral surface that changes the visible figure according to the angle of the visible rotation direction. The figures visible on the outer circumferential surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be a plurality of different figures even on the same plane depending on the viewing angle, and the number of possible combinations of figures can be increased.

In the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed as substantially triangular prism-shaped bodies having a substantially triangular cross section, and the shape changing member is arranged on each surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The figure that is visually recognized changes depending on whether it is viewed from the normal direction of the first rotating body or from the direction facing the triangular tops of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. and gaming machine G2, characterized in that, when viewed in a direction facing the triangular apex of the second rotating body, the visually recognized figure is a figure related to the pair of surfaces adjacent to the apex; .

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed as a substantially triangular prism-like body having a substantially triangular cross section, and the shape changing member The visible figure changes when viewed from the normal direction of each surface of the two rotating bodies and when viewed from the direction facing the triangular tops of the first and second rotating bodies. When viewed in a direction opposite to the triangular tops of the first and second rotating bodies, the visible figure is a figure that is related to the pair of surfaces adjacent to the tops, so the first rotating body and the second rotating body are When the second rotating body is a triangular prism-shaped body, the stopping position can be configured not only when each surface stops in front, but also when stopping with the top portion located forward. Thereby, the number of combinations of the stop positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be increased from 3 squared to 6 square.

In the game machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed as substantially triangular prism-shaped bodies having a substantially triangular cross section and are rotated at different rotation ratios, and the shape changing member is configured to When the second rotating body is stopped at a viewing position where the figure drawn on its outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, with the phase of one rotating body being out of phase with the phase of the other rotating body; The game machine G3 is characterized in that the graphic that is visually recognized due to the phase shift changes in a manner that is equivalent to the graphic that is visually recognized when the phases match.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated at different rotation ratios, and the phase of one rotating body is different from the phase of the other rotating body. When stopped with a phase shift, the figure that is visible due to the phase shift changes in a manner that is equivalent to the figure that is visible when the phases match, so it is made to notice that the phase has shifted and the figure is stopped. It can be made difficult.

At this time, since the inclination of the first rotating body and the second rotating body with respect to the front view is slight (preferably 12 degrees or less), the player can feel as if the first rotating body and the second rotating body were stopped. It can be visually recognized that the postures match (no phase shift has occurred), and the presentation effect can be improved.

A gaming machine G4, which is any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, wherein the first rotating body and the second rotating body move in the radial direction of their respective rotating shafts.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first rotating body and the second rotating body move in the radial direction of their respective rotating shafts, so that the effects of the respective rotating bodies are improved. Since the angle of the player with respect to the rotating body can be changed while the rotation is stopped, the figure visible on the rotating body can be changed.

For example, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body form rotation axes in the left-right direction and are moved downward from an upper position, the lower the figure, the more the figure that is visible at the upper position is stretched vertically. By forming the shape-changing member in such a manner that it is visually recognized, it is possible to alleviate the sense of discomfort (difference in dimensions in the vertical direction) when viewing the surface diagonally.

In the gaming machine G4, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are movable at least between an upper position formed above the gaming area and a lower position formed below the upper position. and when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged at the lower position, the rotation stop positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are such that the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged at the upper position. and a normal line of a surface that is visually recognized as compared to a rotation stop position of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the second rotating body is arranged is formed upward. Game machine G5.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G4, due to the arrangement of the first rotating body and the second rotating body within the gaming area, the normal line of the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the stop position is The direction is changed to the player's line of sight side (for example, if it is placed at the bottom position, it will be looked down on by the player, so it will be formed upward), so the player's line of sight and each rotating body Even if the angle formed with the surface changes due to the vertical movement of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the amount of change can be canceled. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the discomfort felt by the player.

In the gaming machine G4, when the surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged at the visible position, the surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are visually recognized by the player as the first rotating body and the second rotating body move. A gaming machine G6 characterized in that the surface to be rotated is rotated in a direction opposite to the direction of movement.

According to the gaming machine G6, when the surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged at visible positions, the surfaces that are visually recognized by the player as the first rotating body and the second rotating body move are rotated in the opposite direction to the moving direction, it is possible to suppress changes in the angles formed between the surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the player's line of sight. It is possible to suppress changes in the visually recognized figure as the rotating body moves.

In any one of gaming machines G4 to G6, the rotation shafts of the first rotation body and the second rotation body are arranged in parallel in the shaft radial direction, and the first rotation body is centered around the rotation axis of the second rotation body. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that it is configured to be swingable.

According to the gaming machine G7, in any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, the respective rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged in parallel in the axis radial direction, and the first rotating body rotates the second rotating body. Since it is possible to swing around the axis, even when the first and second rotating bodies have stopped rotating, the first rotating body can be swung relative to the second rotating body, so that the player can It is possible to simultaneously correct the angle of the outer circumferential surface of each rotating body that is visually recognized and to change the length of the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body that is visually recognized by the player. .

As an effect of changing the length of the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, for example, by shortening the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the first rotating body The break between the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the second rotating body is made difficult to see, and the figures drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are visually recognized as one. There is an effect that can be used.

Furthermore, by increasing the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, for example, a reflecting member such as a mirror may be placed on the back side of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When photographing the second rotating body, the reflecting member can be easily seen from between the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

A gaming machine K1 characterized in that in any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F14, and G1 to G7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F14, and G1 to G7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. K2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F14, and G1 to G7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by the following. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a rotating body on which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer circumferential surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer circumferential surface is made of a light-transmitting material, and a rotating body arranged inside the rotating body. A gaming machine is known, which is provided with a light-emitting means and a container in which a rotating body is rotatably housed, and allows a player to view a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open front part of the housing. There is. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-220215).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the presentation effect of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is not effectively exhibited.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively exhibit the effects of the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body. purpose.
<Means>
To achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 includes a rotating body on which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer circumferential surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer circumferential surface is made of a light-transmitting material; a light-emitting means disposed inside a rotating body; a housing body in which the rotating body is rotatably housed and allows a player to visually see a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body through an open portion on the front surface; In the gaming machine, at least one pair of the rotating bodies is housed in the housing, and one of the pair of rotating bodies has a rotation axis that intersects with the other rotating body.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the housing and visually recognized by the player. .
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the length of the one rotating body in the axial direction is compared to the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The one rotating body and the other rotating body have the same length in the direction perpendicular to the axes, and the one rotating body and the other rotating body have the same length in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the part of the inner surface of the housing that faces the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body has the A mirror-like reflecting member is provided to reflect a figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body, and the total length of the reflecting member and the other rotating body is determined in the axial direction of the one rotating body. In this case, it is considered to be equivalent to the one rotating body.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a rotating body can be utilized.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, it is possible to utilize the effect of light.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, a reflective member can be utilized.
<Sign>
10 pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board
16a plate glass (transparent plate)
112a ball launch unit (operating means)
133 Dispensing device (operating means)
226 audio output device (operating means)
320 drive motor (transportation means)
330 container (displacement member)
330, 6330 , 7330, 8330, 9330, 10330, 11330, 13330, 14330 container
335a opening (open part)
340a, 7340a, 8340a, 10340, 11340a, 12340a, 13340a First rotating body (displacement member, rotating body)
340b, 6340b, 7340b, 8340b, 11340b, 12340b, 13340b Second rotating body (displacement member, rotating body)
343A 1st display board (wall)
343B second display board (wall)
343C third display board (wall)
344 LED (light emitting means)
350 drive motor (drive means)
351 Drive gear (transmission means, first transmission means, second transmission means)
352 transmission gear (transmission means, first transmission means, second transmission means)
353, 2353, 3353 1st gear (transmission means, first transmission means, second transmission means)
354, 2354 , 3354 intermediate gear (transmission means, second transmission means)
355, 2355, 3355 second gear (transmission means, second transmission means)
430, 4430 arm body (displacement member)
433,4449 connecting pin (pin part)
435 drive motor (drive means)
440, 4440 first member (displacement member, second displacement member)
441a, 4439 sliding groove
441 base (main body)
442 Front body (main body)
444 Arm member (driven part)
445 drive motor (second drive means)
530 displacement member (second displacement member)
600 left and right sensor device (sensor device)
610 1st sensor
620 second sensor
6330a electromagnetic solenoid (stopping means)
8333b winding device (biasing means)
8335b locking device (locking member)
8380 shielding device (shielding member)
9381 Rotating plate member (plate member)
10331b Lower intermediate plate (partition plate)
10331e Guide extension part (connecting member)
10331RF reflective material
10331RF1 extension part (part of the slide part)
10331RF2 rack gear part (part of slide part)
10331RFR right side reflective member (side reflective member)
10331RFL left side reflective member (side reflective member)
10333b Rectangular window part (side open part)
10370 Arc plate member (back member)
CS1 torsion spring (biasing means)
FL1 first transmission path (forward direction transmission means)
FL2 second transmission path (reverse direction transmission means)
RK12, RK13 shape changing parts
Y1 first occlusal area (occlusal area)
Y2 second occlusal area (occlusal area)
X1 First non-meshing area (non-meshing area)
X2 Second non-meshing area (non-meshing area)

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 16a Plate glass (transparent plate)
81 Third symbol display device (display device)
4 40,4440 First member (displacement member)
4 44 Arm member ( predetermined member)
6 00 Left and right sensor device (sensor device)
610 First sensor (sensor device)
620 Second sensor (sensor device)

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate disposed on the front side of the game board at an interval through which a game medium can pass, and a transparent plate displaced on the back side of the game board. a displacement member that is arranged so that it can be seen by the player through the opening of the game board, and a displacement member that is arranged on the back side of the displacement member and that can be seen by the player through the opening of the game board. A gaming machine comprising: a display device configured to display a screen; and a sensor device capable of detecting a predetermined object on the front side of the transparent plate,
The displacement member is formed to be movable to a position overlapping at least a portion of a detectable area of the sensor device,
The size of the detectable area of the sensor device is changed according to the displacement of the displacement member,
The sensor device is in a state where it can detect at least before and after displacement of the displacement member,
The display device is capable of performing a display corresponding to the detection by the sensor device and a display corresponding to the displacement of the displacement member ,
The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a predetermined process for causing the sensor device to detect the predetermined object when the gaming machine is powered on,
The game machine includes a predetermined member that is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, and is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member, and the predetermined member is arranged in at least a part of the detectable area of the sensor device. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to be displaced to an overlapping position .

Images